Update vendor branch to gawk-3.0.6.

15 files changed, 11258 insertions, 113 deletions

diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/ChangeLog b/contrib/awk/doc/ChangeLog
index 17f2844..2d8e520 100644
--- a/contrib/awk/doc/ChangeLog
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,56 @@
+Mon Aug  7 15:23:00 2000  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* Release 3.0.6: Release tar file made.
+
+Sun Jun 25 15:08:19 2000  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* Release 3.0.5: Release tar file made.
+
+Wed May 17 19:04:54 2000  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* gawk.texi, gawk.1, awkcard.in: Documented %u.  Ooops.
+
+Tue May  2 11:44:13 2000  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* texinfo.tex: Updated to version 1999-10-01.07.
+	* gawk.texi: Redid page breaking for new texinfo.tex.
+
+Thu Apr  6 12:32:49 2000  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* gawk.texi: Change info dir file entry to `(gawk)' from
+	  `(gawk.info)'.
+	* Makefile.in [$(infodir)/gawk.info]: Fix grep test is
+	  accordance with above.
+
+Sun Feb 13 15:36:32 2000  Paul Eggert  <eggert@twinsun.com>
+
+	* gawk.texi: Mention that arithmetic is done in double
+	  precision floating point, and point to Goldberg's paper for
+	  people who want to know more.  Fix some other minor floating
+	  point discussion issues.
+
+Wed Nov  3 17:04:35 1999  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* gawk.1: Lots of troff ``lint'' from Paul Eggert.  Not all
+	  of his changes, just the ones I thought worth doing.
+
+Mon Oct 11 16:53:54 1999  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* Makefile.in (gawk.dvi): Put $(srcdir) first in TEXINPUTS,
+	  and also just use texi2dvi, don't run texindex and tex
+	  manually.  Doing so is no longer necessary.
+
+Mon Aug  9 13:06:01 1999  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* gawk.texi: New node `Array Efficiency' on the best use
+	  of subscripting to avoid memory bloat.
+
+Thu Jul 29 23:15:34 1999  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@skeeve.com>
+
+	* Makefile.in ($(infodir)/gawk.info): Removed loop around
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA), since there's only one Info file to install,
+	  install it directly.
+
 Wed Jun 30 16:14:36 1999  Arnold D. Robbins  <arnold@gnu.org>
 
 	* Release 3.0.4: Release tar file made.  This time for sure.
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/Makefile.in b/contrib/awk/doc/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..edcf404
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+# Makefile for GNU Awk documentation.
+#
+# Copyright (C) 1993-2000 the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# 
+# This file is part of GAWK, the GNU implementation of the
+# AWK Programming Language.
+# 
+# GAWK is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+# 
+# GAWK is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+# 
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+srcdir = @srcdir@
+VPATH = @srcdir@
+
+INSTALL = @INSTALL@
+INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
+INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
+
+prefix = @prefix@
+exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
+binprefix =
+manprefix =
+
+bindir = @bindir@
+libdir = @libdir@
+mandir = @mandir@/man1
+manext = .1
+infodir = @infodir@
+datadir = @datadir@/awk
+
+TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi
+TEX = tex
+MAKEINFO = makeinfo --no-split
+TROFF = groff -t -Tps
+SEDME = sed -e "s/^level0 restore/level0 restore flashme 100 72 moveto (Copyright `date '+%m-%d-%y %T'`, FSF, Inc. (all)) show/" \
+		-e "s/^\/level0 save def/\/level0 save def 30 -48 translate/"
+
+DOCS= gawk.1 igawk.1 gawk.texi
+
+TEXFILES= gawk.aux gawk.cp gawk.cps gawk.fn gawk.fns gawk.ky gawk.kys \
+	   gawk.pg gawk.pgs gawk.toc gawk.tp gawk.tps gawk.vr gawk.vrs
+
+ALLDOC= gawk.dvi $(TEXFILES) gawk.log awkcard.tr
+
+CARDSRC = $(srcdir)/macros $(srcdir)/cardfonts $(srcdir)/colors awkcard.tr
+CARDSRC_N = $(srcdir)/macros $(srcdir)/cardfonts $(srcdir)/no.colors awkcard.tr
+CARDFILES= $(CARDSRC) ad.block awkcard.in setter.outline
+
+# Use this if your troff can correctly handle macros from 'colors' file
+AWKCARD = awkcard.ps
+
+# Uncomment the following definition of AWKCARD if your troff can produce
+# Postscript but still has troubles with macros from 'colors'.  As this
+# is not groff you will have to change TROFF macro as well.  Do not forget
+# to ensure that awkcard.tr is processed by tbl.
+#AWKCARD = awkcard.nc
+
+all: $(DOCS) info
+
+install: $(mandir)/gawk$(manext) $(mandir)/igawk$(manext) $(infodir)/gawk.info
+
+$(infodir)/gawk.info::
+	-if test -f gawk.info; then d=.; \
+	else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	if    [ -f $(infodir)/dir -a -f $(infodir)/gawk.info ] \
+	   && cmp $$d/gawk.info $(infodir)/gawk.info > /dev/null \
+	   && grep '(gawk)' $(infodir)/dir  > /dev/null; then \
+		exit 0; \
+	fi; \
+	$(INSTALL_DATA) $$d/gawk.info $(infodir)/gawk.info ; \
+	if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version' > /dev/null 2>&1 ; \
+	then install-info --info-dir=$(infodir) gawk.info ; \
+	else true ; fi; exit 0
+
+$(mandir)/gawk$(manext):: gawk.1
+	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/gawk.1 $(mandir)/gawk$(manext)
+
+$(mandir)/igawk$(manext):: igawk.1
+	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/igawk.1 $(mandir)/igawk$(manext)
+
+uninstall:
+	rm -f $(mandir)/gawk$(manext) $(mandir)/igawk$(manext) $(infodir)/gawk.info*
+
+dvi:	gawk.dvi
+
+gawk.dvi: gawk.texi
+	-TEXINPUTS=$(srcdir):$$TEXINPUTS $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/gawk.texi
+
+info:	gawk.info
+
+gawk.info: gawk.texi
+	$(MAKEINFO) $(srcdir)/gawk.texi
+
+postscript: dvi gawk.1 igawk.1 $(AWKCARD)
+	-groff -man $(srcdir)/gawk.1 > gawk.1.ps
+	-groff -man $(srcdir)/igawk.1 > igawk.1.ps
+	dvips -o gawk.ps gawk.dvi
+
+awkcard.tr: awkcard.in
+	sed 's:SRCDIR:$(srcdir):' < $(srcdir)/awkcard.in > awkcard.tr
+
+awkcard.ps: $(CARDFILES)
+	$(TROFF) $(CARDSRC) | $(SEDME) | cat $(srcdir)/setter.outline - > awkcard.ps
+
+awkcard.nc: $(CARDFILES)
+	$(TROFF) $(CARDSRC_N) | $(SEDME) | cat $(srcdir)/setter.outline - > awkcard.ps && touch awkcard.nc
+
+clean:
+	rm -f *.ps $(ALLDOC) *~ awkcard.nc
+
+distclean: clean
+	rm -f Makefile
+
+maintainer-clean: distclean
+	@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use; it"
+	@echo "deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
+	rm -f gawk.info
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/README.card b/contrib/awk/doc/README.card
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef77cda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/README.card
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+Mon Dec  9 12:45:48 EST 1996
+
+The AWK reference card included here requires a modern version of troff
+(ditroff). GNU Troff (groff) is known to work.
+
+If your troff is able to produce Postscript but does not know how to
+properly use the macros from `colors' file then try to uncomment in
+Makefile the defintion which sets AWKCARD to awkcard.nc (no colors).
+This will definitely require changes to the TROFF macro and you have to
+ensure that the tbl preprocessor is called.  For example, the following
+modifications on NeXT:
+
+TROFF = tbl
+SEDME = ptroff -t | sed -e \
+	"s/^level0 restore/level0 restore flashme 100 72 moveto\
+ (Copyright `date`, FSF, Inc. (all)) show/" \
+	-e "s/^\/level0 save def/\/level0 save def 30 -48 translate/"
+
+will produce a correctly formatted, albeit monochromatic, reference card.
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/ad.block b/contrib/awk/doc/ad.block
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d31f5d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/ad.block
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+.\" AWK Reference Card --- Arnold Robbins, arnold@gnu.org
+.\" This file is the Ad block (included in cover)
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 1996, 98 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+.\" this reference card provided the copyright notice and this permission
+.\" notice are preserved on all copies.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to process this file through troff and print the
+.\" results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+.\" notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+.\" (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed reference card).
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+.\" reference card under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+.\" permission notice identical to this one.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+.\" reference card into another language, under the above conditions for
+.\" modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in
+.\" a translation approved by the Foundation.
+.\"
+.ft HB
+.ps 10
+.vs 12
+.ES
+.nf
+.ce 7
+\*(CBFree Software Foundation, Inc.
+.ft H
+59 Temple Place \(em Suite 330
+Boston, MA  02111-1307 USA
+Phone: +1-617-542-5942
+Fax (including Japan): +1-617-542-2652
+E-mail: gnu@gnu.org
+URL: http://www.gnu.org
+
+.ce 7
+.ft HB
+\*(CGFree Software
+Source Distributions on CD-ROM
+Deluxe Distributions
+Emacs, Gawk, Make and GDB Manuals
+Emacs and GDB References\*(CX
+.EB "\f(HBOTHER FSF PRODUCTS:\*(FR"
+.ps
+.vs
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/awkcard.in b/contrib/awk/doc/awkcard.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac1e8e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/awkcard.in
@@ -0,0 +1,1550 @@
+.\" AWK Reference Card --- Arnold Robbins, arnold@gnu.org
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+.\" this reference card provided the copyright notice and this permission
+.\" notice are preserved on all copies.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to process this file through troff and print the
+.\" results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+.\" notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+.\" (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed reference card).
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+.\" reference card under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+.\" permission notice identical to this one.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+.\" reference card into another language, under the above conditions for
+.\" modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in
+.\" a translation approved by the Foundation.
+.\"
+.\" Strings to save typing
+.ds AK \*(FCawk\*(FR
+.ds GK \*(FCgawk\*(FR
+.ds NK Bell Labs \*(FCawk\*(FR
+.ds MK \*(FCmawk\*(FR
+.\"
+.\"
+.de TD\" tab defaults
+.ta .2i .78i 1i 1.2i 1.4i 1.7i
+..
+.de TE
+.TD
+..
+
+.sp
+.ce
+\*(CD\f(HB\s+8AWK REFERENCE\s0\*(FR
+.sp
+.\" --- Table Of Contents
+.ta 2.4i 2.6iR
+.lc .
+.ES
+.in +.2i
+.nf
+\*(FRAWK Program Execution
	4
+Action Statements
	7
+Arrays
	9
+Bug Reports
	15
+Command Line Arguments (standard)
	2
+Command Line Arguments (\*(GK)
	3
+Command Line Arguments (\*(MK)
	4
+Conversions And Comparisons
	10
+Copying Permissions
	16
+Definitions
	2
+Environment Variables
	16
+Escape Sequences
	7
+Expressions
	9
+Fields
	6
+FTP Information
	16
+Historical Features (\*(GK)
	16
+Input Control
	11
+Lines And Statements
	5
+.ig
+Localization
	10
+..
+Numeric Functions
	13
+Output Control
	11
+Pattern Elements
	7
+POSIX Character Classes (\*(GK)
	6
+Printf Formats
	12
+Records
	6
+Regular Expressions
	5
+Special Filenames
	13
+String Functions
	14
+Time Functions (\*(GK)
	15
+User-defined Functions
	15
+Variables
	8\*(CX
+.in -.2i
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBCONTENTS\*(FR\s0"
+.sp
+.TD
+.fi
+\*(CD\*(FRThis reference card was written by Arnold Robbins.
+Brian Kernighan and Michael Brennan reviewed it; we thank them
+for their help.
+.sp
+.SL
+.sp
+.so SRCDIR/ad.block
+.\" a subtlety here; this line changes color. We rely on it
+.\" also to provide a blank line.
+\*(CD
+.SL
+.nf
+\*(FR\(co Copyright 1996-2000, Free Software Foundation
+59 Temple Place \(em Suite 330
+Boston, MA  02111-1307 USA
+.nf
+.BT
+
+
+.\"
+.\"
+.\" --- Definitions
+.fi
+.ES
+\*(CDThis card describes POSIX AWK, as well as the three
+freely available \*(AK implementations
+(see \fHFTP Information\fP below).
+\*(CLCommon extensions (in two or more versions) are printed in light blue.
+\*(CBFeatures specific to just one version\(emusually GNU AWK (\*(GK)\(emare
+printed in dark blue.
+\*(CRExceptions and deprecated features are printed in red.
+\*(CDFeatures mandated by POSIX are printed in black.
+.sp .5
+Several type faces are used to clarify the meaning:
+.br
+.nr IN \w'\(bu '
+\(bu \*(FC\*(CN\fP is used for computer input.
+.br
+.fi
+.in +\n(INu
+.ti -\n(INu
+\(bu\|\^\*(FI\*(IN\fP is used to indicate user input and for syntactic
+placeholders, such as \*(FIvariable\fP or \*(FIaction\fP.
+.in -\n(INu
+.br
+\(bu \*(RN is used for explanatory text.
+.sp .5
+\*(FInumber\fP \- a floating point number as in ANSI C, such as
+\*(FC3\*(FR,
+\*(FC2.3\*(FR,
+\*(FC.4\*(FR,
+\*(FC1.4e2\*(FR
+or
+\*(FC4.1E5\*(FR.
+.sp .5
+\*(FIescape sequences\fP \- a special sequence of characters beginning
+with a backslash, used to describe otherwise unprintable characters.
+(See \fHEscape Sequences\fP below.)
+.sp .5
+\*(FIstring\fP \- a group of characters enclosed in double quotes.
+Strings may contain \*(FIescape sequences\*(FR.
+.sp .5
+\*(FIregexp\fP \- a regular expression, either a regexp constant
+enclosed in forward slashes, or a dynamic regexp computed at run-time.
+Regexp constants may contain \*(FIescape sequences\*(FR.
+.sp .5
+\*(FIname\fP \- a variable, array or function name.
+.sp .5
+\*(FIentry\fP(\*(FIN\fP) \- entry \*(FIentry\fP in section \*(FIN\fP of the
+UNIX reference manual.
+.sp .5
+\*(FIpattern\fP \- an expression describing an input record to be matched.
+.sp .5
+\*(FIaction\fP \- statements to execute when an input record is matched.
+.sp .5
+\*(FIrule\fP \- a pattern-action pair, where the pattern or action may
+be missing.\*(CX
+.EB \s+2\f(HBDEFINITIONS\*(FR\s0
+
+.\" --- Command Line Arguments
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDCommand line arguments control setting the field separator,
+setting variables before the \*(FCBEGIN\fP rule is run, and
+the location of AWK program source code.
+Implementation-specific command line arguments change
+the behavior of the running interpreter.
+.sp .5
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(2.2i).
+\*(FC\-F \*(FIfs\*(FR	use \*(FIfs\fP for the input field separator.
+\*(FC\-v\*(FI var\*(FC\^=\^\*(FIval\*(FR	T{
+assign the value \*(FIval\*(FR, to the variable \*(FIvar\*(FR,
+before execution of the program begins. Such
+variable values are available to the \*(FCBEGIN\fP rule.
+T}
+\*(FC\-f \*(FIprog-file\*(FR	T{
+read the AWK program source from the file
+\*(FIprog-file\*(FR, instead of from the first command
+line argument. Multiple \*(FC\-f\*(FR options may be used.
+T}
+\*(FC\-\^\-\*(FR	signal the end of options.
+.TE
+.sp .5
+.fi
+\*(CLThe following options are accepted by both \*(NK and \*(GK
+\*(CR(ignored by \*(GK, not in \*(MK).\*(CL
+.sp .5
+.nf
+.TS
+expand, tab(%);
+l lw(2.2i).
+\*(FC\-mf \*(FIval\*(FR%set the maximum number of fields to \*(FIval\fP
+\*(FC\-mr \*(FIval\*(FR%set the maximum record size to \*(FIval\fP\*(CX
+.TE
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBCOMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS (standard)\*(FR\s0"
+
+.BT
+
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDThe following options are specific to \*(GK. The \*(FC\-W\*(FR
+forms are for full POSIX compliance.
+.sp .5
+.ig
+.\" This option is left undocumented, on purpose.
+\*(FC\-\^\-nostalgia\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W nostalgia\*(FR%T{
+provide a moment of nostalgia for
+long time \*(AK users.
+T}
+..
+.TS
+expand, tab(%);
+ls
+l lw(1.8i).
+\*(FC\-\^\-field-separator \*(FIfs\*(FR
+%just like \*(FC\-F\fP
+\*(FC\-\^\-assign \*(FIvar\*(FC\^=\^\*(FIval\*(FR%just like \*(FC\-v\fP
+\*(FC\-\^\-file \*(FIprog-file%\*(FRjust like \*(FC\-f\fP
+\*(FC\-\^\-traditional\*(FR
+\*(FC\-\^\-compat\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W compat\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W traditional\*(FR%T{
+turn off \*(GK-specific extensions
+(\*(FC\-\^\-traditional\*(FR preferred).
+T}
+\*(FC\-\^\-copyleft\*(FR
+\*(FC\-\^\-copyright\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W copyleft\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W copyright\*(FR%T{
+print the short version of the GNU
+copyright information on \*(FCstdout\*(FR.
+T}
+\*(FC\-\^\-help\*(FR
+\*(FC\-\^\-usage\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W help\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W usage\*(FR%T{
+print a short summary of the available
+options on \*(FCstdout\*(FR, then exit zero.
+T}
+\*(FC\-\^\-lint\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W lint\*(FR%T{
+warn about constructs that are dubious
+or non-portable to other \*(AKs.
+T}
+\*(FC\-\^\-lint\-old\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W lint\-old\*(FR%T{
+warn about constructs that are not
+portable to the original version of
+Unix \*(AK.
+T}
+\*(FC\-\^\-posix\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W posix\*(FR%T{
+disable common and GNU extensions.
+Enable \*(FIinterval expressions\*(FR in regular
+expression matching (see \fHRegular
+Expressions\fP below).
+T}
+\*(FC\-\^\-re\-interval\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W re\-interval\*(FR%T{
+enable \*(FIinterval expressions\*(FR in regular
+expression matching (see \fHRegular
+Expressions\fP below). Useful if
+\*(FC\-\^\-posix\*(FR is not specified.
+T}
+\*(FC\-\^\-source '\*(FItext\*(FC'\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W source '\*(FItext\*(FC'\*(FR%use \*(FItext\*(FR as AWK program source code.
+\*(FC\-\^\-version\*(FR
+\*(FC\-W version\*(FR%T{
+print version information on \*(FCstdout\fP
+and exit zero.
+T}
+.TE
+.sp .5
+.fi
+In compatibility mode,
+any other options are flagged as illegal, but are otherwise ignored.
+In normal operation, as long as program text has been supplied, unknown
+options are passed on to the AWK program in
+\*(FCARGV\*(FR
+for processing. This is most useful for running AWK
+programs via the \*(FC#!\*(FR executable interpreter mechanism.\*(CB
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBCOMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS (\*(GK\f(HB)\*(FR\s0"
+
+.BT
+
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDThe following options are specific to \*(MK.
+.sp .5
+.fi
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(1.8i).
+\*(FC\-W dump\*(FR	T{
+print an assembly listing of the program to
+\*(FCstdout\fP and exit zero.
+T}
+\*(FC\-W exec \*(FIfile\*(FR	T{
+read program text from \*(FIfile\fP. No other
+options are processed. Useful with \*(FC#!\fP.
+T}
+\*(FC\-W interactive\*(FR	T{
+unbuffer \*(FCstdout\fP and line buffer \*(FCstdin\fP.
+Lines are always records, ignoring \*(FCRS\fP
+T}
+\*(FC\-W posix_space\*(FR	T{
+\*(FC\en\*(FR separates fields when \*(FCRS = "\^"\fP.
+T}
+\*(FC\-W sprintf=\*(FInum\*(FR	T{
+adjust the size of \*(MK's internal
+\*(FCsprintf\*(FR buffer.
+T}
+\*(FC\-W version\*(FR	T{
+print version and copyright on
+\*(FCstdout\fP and limit information on \*(FCstderr\fP
+and exit zero.
+T}
+.TE
+.sp .5
+.fi
+The options may be abbreviated using just the first letter, e.g.,
+\*(FC\-We\*(FR,
+\*(FC\-Wv\*(FR
+and so on.\*(CB
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBCOMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS (\*(MK\f(HB)\*(FR\s0"
+
+.\" --- Awk Program Execution
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDAWK programs are a sequence of pattern-action statements
+and optional function definitions.
+.sp .5
+	\*(FIpattern\*(FC	{ \*(FIaction statements\*(FC }\*(FR
+.br
+	\*(FCfunction \*(FIname\*(FC(\*(FIparameter list\*(FC) { \*(FIstatements\*(FC }\*(FR
+.sp .5
+\*(AK first reads the program source from the
+\*(FIprog-file\*(FR(s), if specified,
+\*(CBfrom arguments to \*(FC\-\^\-source\*(FR,\*(CD
+or from the first non-option argument on the command line.
+The program text is read as if all the \*(FIprog-file\*(FR(s)
+\*(CBand command line
+source texts\*(CD had been concatenated.
+.sp .5
+AWK programs execute in the following order.
+First, all variable assignments specified via the \*(FC\-v\fP
+option are performed.
+Next, \*(AK executes the code in the
+\*(FCBEGIN\fP rules(s), if any, and then proceeds to read
+the files \*(FC1\fP through \*(FCARGC \- 1\fP in the \*(FCARGV\fP array.
+(Adjusting \*(FCARGC\fP and \*(FCARGV\fP thus provides control over
+the input files that will be processed.)
+If there are no files named on the command line,
+\*(AK reads the standard input.
+.sp .5
+If a command line argument has the form
+\*(FIvar\*(FC=\*(FIval\*(FR,
+it is treated as a variable assignment. The variable
+\*(FIvar\fP will be assigned the value \*(FIval\*(FR.
+(This happens after any \*(FCBEGIN\fP rule(s) have been run.)
+... delete this paragraph if no space
+Command line variable assignment
+is most useful for dynamically assigning values to the variables
+\*(AK uses to control how input is broken into fields and records. It
+is also useful for controlling state if multiple passes are needed over
+a single data file.
+.sp .5
+If the value of a particular element of \*(FCARGV\fP is empty
+(\*(FC"\^"\*(FR), \*(AK skips over it.
+.sp .5
+For each record in the input, \*(AK tests to see if it matches any
+\*(FIpattern\fP in the AWK program.
+For each pattern that the record matches, the associated
+\*(FIaction\fP is executed.
+The patterns are tested in the order they occur in the program.
+.sp .5
+Finally, after all the input is exhausted,
+\*(AK executes the code in the \*(FCEND\fP rule(s), if any.
+.sp .5
+If a program only has a \*(FCBEGIN\fP rule, no input files are processed.
+If a program only has an \*(FCEND\fP rule, the input will be read.
+\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBAWK PROGRAM EXECUTION\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+.BT
+
+.\" --- Lines And Statements
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDAWK is a line oriented language. The pattern comes first, and then the
+action. Action statements are enclosed in \*(FC{\fP and \*(FC}\*(FR.
+Either the pattern  or the action may be missing, but
+not both. If the pattern is missing, the action will be
+executed for every input record.
+A missing action is equivalent to
+.sp .5
+	\*(FC{ print }\fP
+.sp .5
+which prints the entire record.
+.sp .5
+Comments begin with the \*(FC#\*(FR character, and continue until the
+end of the line.
+Normally, a statement ends with a newline, but lines ending in
+a ``,'',
+\*(FC{\*(FR,
+\*(CB\*(FC?\*(FR,
+\*(FC:\*(FR,\*(CD
+\*(FC&&\*(FR
+or
+\*(FC||\*(FR
+are automatically continued.
+Lines ending in \*(FCdo\fP or \*(FCelse\fP
+also have their statements automatically continued on the following line.
+In other cases, a line can be continued by ending it with a ``\e'',
+in which case the newline will be ignored. However, a ``\e'' after a
+\*(FC#\*(FR is not special.
+.sp .5
+Multiple statements may be put on one line by separating them with a ``;''.
+This applies to both the statements within the action part of a
+pattern-action pair (the usual case)
+and to the pattern-action statements themselves.\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBLINES AND STATEMENTS\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+
+.\" --- Regular Expressions
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDRegular expressions are the extended kind originally defined by
+\*(FCegrep\fP.
+\*(CBAdditional GNU regexp operators are supported by \*(GK.
+A \*(FIword-constituent\fP character is a letter, digit, or
+underscore (\*(FC_\fP).\*(CD
+.sp .5
+.TS
+center, tab(~);
+cp8 sp8
+cp8 sp8
+lp8|lp8.
+.\" .vs 10
+_
+Summary of Regular Expressions
+In Decreasing Precedence
+_
+\*(FC(\^\*(FIr\*(FC)\*(FR~regular expression (for grouping)
+\*(FIc\*(FR~if non-special char, matches itself
+\*(FC\e\*(FI\^c\*(FR~turn off special meaning of \*(FIc\fP
+\*(FC^\*(FR~beginning of string (note: \*(FInot\fP line)
+\*(FC$\*(FR~end of string (note: \*(FInot\fP line)
+\*(FC.\*(FR~any single character, including newline
+\*(FC[\*(FR...\*(FC]\*(FR~any one character in ... or range
+\*(FC[^\*(FR...\*(FC]\*(FR~any one character not in ... or range
+\*(CB\*(FC\ey\*(FR~word boundary
+\*(FC\eB\*(FR~middle of a word
+\*(FC\e<\*(FR~beginning of a word
+\*(FC\e>\*(FR~end of a word
+\*(FC\ew\*(FR~any word-constituent character
+\*(FC\eW\*(FR~any non-word-constituent character
+\*(FC\e`\*(FR~beginning of a buffer (string)
+\*(FC\e'\*(FR~end of a buffer (string)\*(CD
+\*(FIr\*(FC*\*(FR~zero or more occurrences of \*(FIr\*(FR
+\*(FIr\*(FC+\*(FR~one or more occurrences of \*(FIr\*(FR
+\*(FIr\*(FC?\*(FR~zero or one occurrences of \*(FIr\*(FR
+\*(FIr\*(FC{\*(FIn\*(FC,\*(FIm\*(FC}\*(FR~\*(FIn\fP to \*(FIm\fP occurrences of \*(FIr\*(FR \*(CR(POSIX: see note below)\*(CD
+\*(FIr1\*(FC|\|\*(FIr2\*(FR~\*(FIr1\*(FR or \*(FIr2\*(FR
+.TE
+.sp .5
+.fi
+\*(CRThe \*(FIr\*(FC{\*(FIn\*(FC,\*(FIm\*(FC}\*(FR notation is called an
+\*(FIinterval expression\fP. POSIX mandates it for AWK regexps, but
+most \*(AKs don't implement it. \*(CBUse \*(FC\-\^\-re\-interval\*(FR
+or \*(FC\-\^\-posix\*(FR to enable
+this feature in \*(GK.\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBREGULAR EXPRESSIONS\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+.BT
+
+.\" --- POSIX Character Classes (gawk)
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDIn regular expressions, within character ranges
+(\*(FC[\*(FR...\*(FC]\*(FR),
+the notation \*(FC[[:\*(FIclass\*(FC:]]\*(FR defines characters classes:
+.sp .5
+.TS
+center, tab(~);
+lp8 lp8 lp8 lp8.
+\*(FCalnum\*(FR~alphanumeric~\*(FClower\*(FR~lower-case
+\*(FCalpha\*(FR~alphabetic~\*(FCprint\*(FR~printable
+\*(FCblank\*(FR~space or tab~\*(FCpunct\*(FR~punctuation
+\*(FCcntrl\*(FR~control~\*(FCspace\*(FR~whitespace
+\*(FCdigit\*(FR~decimal~\*(FCupper\*(FR~upper-case
+\*(FCgraph\*(FR~non-spaces~\*(FCxdigit\*(FR~hexadecimal\*(CB
+.TE
+.fi
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBPOSIX CHARACTER CLASSES (\*(GK\f(HB)\*(FR\s0"
+
+.\" --- Records
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDNormally, records are separated by newline characters.
+Assigning values to the built-in variable \*(FCRS\*(FR
+controls how records are separated.
+If \*(FCRS\fP is any single character, that character separates records.
+\*(CLOtherwise, \*(FCRS\fP is a regular expression.
+\*(CR(Not \*(NK.)\*(CL
+Text in the input that matches this
+regular expression will separate the record.
+\*(CB\*(GK sets \*(FCRT\*(FR to the value of the
+input text that matched the regular expression.
+The value of \*(FCIGNORECASE\fP
+will also affect how records are separated when
+\*(FCRS\fP is a regular expression.\*(CD
+If \*(FCRS\fP is set to the null string,
+then records are separated by one or more blank lines.
+When \*(FCRS\fP is set to the null string,
+the newline character always acts as
+a field separator, in addition to whatever value
+\*(FCFS\fP may have.
+\*(CB\*(MK does not apply exceptional rules to \*(FCFS\fP
+when \*(FCRS = "\^"\fP.\*(CX
+.EB \s+2\f(HBRECORDS\*(FR\s0
+
+.\" --- Fields
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDAs each input record is read, \*(AK splits the record into
+\*(FIfields\*(FR, using the value of the \*(FCFS\fP
+variable as the field separator.
+If \*(FCFS\fP is a single character,
+fields are separated by that character.
+\*(CLIf \*(FCFS\fP is the null string,
+then each individual character becomes a separate field.\*(CD
+Otherwise, \*(FCFS\fP is expected to be a full regular expression.
+In the special case that \*(FCFS\fP
+is a single space, fields are separated
+by runs of spaces and/or tabs
+\*(CLand/or newlines\*(CD.
+Leading and trailing whitespace are ignored.
+\*(CBThe value of \*(FCIGNORECASE\fP
+will also affect how fields are split when
+\*(FCFS\fP is a regular expression.\*(CD
+.sp .5
+\*(CBIf the \*(FCFIELDWIDTHS\fP
+variable is set to a space separated list of numbers, each field is
+expected to have a fixed width, and \*(GK
+will split up the record using the specified widths.
+The value of \*(FCFS\fP is ignored.
+Assigning a new value to \*(FCFS\fP
+overrides the use of \*(FCFIELDWIDTHS\*(FR,
+and restores the default behavior.\*(CD
+.sp .5
+Each field in the input record may be referenced by its position,
+\*(FC$1\*(FR, \*(FC$2\*(FR and so on.
+\*(FC$0\fP is the whole record.
+Fields may also be assigned new values.
+.sp .5
+The variable \*(FCNF\fP
+is set to the total number of fields in the input record.
+.sp .5
+References to non-existent fields (i.e., fields after \*(FC$NF\*(FR)
+produce the null-string. However, assigning to a non-existent field
+(e.g., \*(FC$(NF+2) = 5\*(FR) will increase the value of
+\*(FCNF\*(FR, create any intervening fields with the null string as their value,
+and cause the value of \*(FC$0\fP
+to be recomputed with the fields being separated by the
+value of \*(FCOFS\*(FR.
+References to negative numbered fields cause a fatal error.
+Decreasing the value of \*(FCNF\fP causes the trailing fields to be lost
+\*(CR(not \*(NK).\*(CX
+.EB \s+2\f(HBFIELDS\*(FR\s0
+
+.BT
+
+.\" --- Pattern Elements
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDAWK patterns may be one of the following.
+.sp .5
+.nf
+	\*(FCBEGIN
+	END
+	\*(FIexpression	
+	pat1\*(FC,\*(FIpat2\*(FR
+.sp .5
+.fi
+\*(FCBEGIN\fP and \*(FCEND\fP are special patterns that provide start-up
+and clean-up actions respectively. They must have actions. There can
+be multiple \*(FCBEGIN\fP and \*(FCEND\fP rules; they are merged and
+executed as if there had just been one large rule. They may occur anywhere
+in a program, including different source files.
+.sp .5
+Expression patterns can be any expression, as described
+under \fHExpressions\fP.
+.sp .5
+The \*(FIpat1\*(FC,\*(FIpat2\*(FR pattern
+is called a \*(FIrange pattern\*(FR.
+It matches all input records starting with a record that matches
+\*(FIpat1\*(FR, and continuing until a record that matches
+\*(FIpat2\*(FR, inclusive.
+It does not combine with any other pattern expression.\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBPATTERN ELEMENTS\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+.\" --- Action Statements
+.ES
+.nf
+\*(CD\*(FCif (\*(FIcondition\*(FC) \*(FIstatement\*(FR [ \*(FCelse\*(FI statement \*(FR]
+\*(FCwhile (\*(FIcondition\*(FC) \*(FIstatement \*(FR
+\*(FCdo \*(FIstatement  \*(FCwhile (\*(FIcondition\*(FC)\*(FR
+\*(FCfor (\*(FIexpr1\*(FC; \*(FIexpr2\*(FC; \*(FIexpr3\*(FC) \*(FIstatement\*(FR
+\*(FCfor (\*(FIvar \*(FCin\*(FI array\*(FC) \*(FIstatement\*(FR
+.ig
+\*(CB\*(FCabort\*(FR [ \*(FIexpression\*(FR ]\*(CD
+..
+\*(FCbreak\*(FR
+\*(FCcontinue\*(FR
+\*(FCdelete \*(FIarray\^\*(FC[\^\*(FIindex\^\*(FC]\*(FR
+\*(CL\*(FCdelete \*(FIarray\^\*(FR\*(CD
+\*(FCexit\*(FR [ \*(FIexpression\*(FR ]
+\*(FCnext\*(FR
+\*(CL\*(FCnextfile\*(FR \*(CR(not \*(MK)\*(CD
+\*(FC{ \*(FIstatements \*(FC}\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBACTION STATEMENTS\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+
+.\" --- Escape Sequences
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDWithin strings constants (\*(FC"..."\fP) and regexp
+constants (\*(FC/.../\fP), escape sequences may be used to
+generate otherwise unprintable characters. This table lists
+the available escape sequences.
+.sp .5
+.ig
+\*(CB\*(FCPROCINFO\fP	T{
+elements of this array provide access to info
+about the running AWK program. See
+\*(AM for details.\*(CD
+T}
+..
+.TS
+center, tab(~);
+lp8 lp8 lp8 lp8.
+\*(FC\ea\fP~alert (bell)~\*(FC\er\fP~carriage return
+\*(FC\eb\fP~backspace~\*(FC\et\fP~horizontal tab
+\*(FC\ef\fP~form feed~\*(FC\ev\fP~vertical tab
+\*(FC\en\fP~newline~\*(FC\e\e\fP~backslash
+\*(FC\e\*(FIddd\*(FR~octal value \*(FIddd\fP~\*(CL\*(FC\ex\*(FIhh\*(FR~hex value \*(FIhh\fP\*(CD
+\*(FC\e"\fP~double quote~\*(FC\e/\fP~forward slash\*(CX
+.TE
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBESCAPE SEQUENCES\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+.BT
+
+.\" --- Variables
+.ES
+.fi
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(2i).
+\*(FCARGC\fP	T{
+number of command line arguments.
+T}
+\*(CB\*(FCARGIND\fP	T{
+index in \*(FCARGV\fP of current data file.\*(CD
+T}
+\*(FCARGV\fP	T{
+array of command line arguments. Indexed from
+0 to \*(FCARGC\fP \- 1. Dynamically changing the
+contents of \*(FCARGV\fP can control the files used
+for data.
+T}
+\*(FCCONVFMT\fP	T{
+conversion format for numbers, default value
+is \*(FC"%.6g"\*(FR.
+T}
+\*(FCENVIRON\fP	T{
+array containing the the current environment.
+The array is indexed by the environment
+variables, each element being the value of
+that variable.
+T}
+\*(CB\*(FCERRNO\fP	T{
+contains a string describing the error when a
+redirection or read for \*(FCgetline\*(FR fails, or if
+\*(FCclose()\*(FR fails.
+T}
+\*(FCFIELDWIDTHS\fP	T{
+white-space separated list of fieldwidths. Used
+to parse the input into fields of fixed width,
+instead of the value of \*(FCFS\fP.\*(CD
+T}
+\*(FCFILENAME\fP	T{
+name of the current input file. If no files given
+on the command line, \*(FCFILENAME\fP is ``\-''.
+\*(FCFILENAME\fP is undefined inside the \*(FCBEGIN\fP rule
+(unless set by \*(FCgetline\fP).
+T}
+\*(FCFNR\fP	T{
+number of the input record in current input file.
+T}
+\*(FCFS\fP	T{
+input field separator, a space by default
+(see \fHFields\fP above).
+T}
+\*(CB\*(FCIGNORECASE\fP	T{
+if non-zero, all regular expression and string
+operations ignore case. \*(CRIn versions of \*(GK
+prior to 3.0, \*(FCIGNORECASE\fP only affected
+regular expression operations and \*(FCindex()\*(FR.\*(CD
+T}
+\*(FCNF\fP	T{
+number of fields in the current input record.
+T}
+\*(FCNR\fP	T{
+total number of input records seen so far.
+T}
+\*(FCOFMT\fP	T{
+output format for numbers, \*(FC"%.6g"\*(FR, by default.
+\*(CROld versions of \*(AK also used this for number
+to string conversion instead of \*(FCCONVFMT\fP.\*(CD
+T}
+\*(FCOFS\fP	T{
+output field separator, a space by default.
+T}
+\*(FCORS\fP	T{
+output record separator, a newline by default.
+T}
+\*(FCRS\fP	T{
+input record separator, a newline by default
+(see \fHRecords\fP above).
+T}
+\*(CB\*(FCRT\fP	T{
+record terminator. \*(GK sets \*(FCRT\fP to the input
+text that matched the character or regular
+expression specified by \*(FCRS\*(FR.\*(CD
+T}
+\*(FCRSTART\fP	T{
+index of the first character matched by
+\*(FCmatch()\*(FR; 0 if no match.
+T}
+\*(FCRLENGTH\fP	T{
+length of the string matched by \*(FCmatch()\*(FR;
+\-1 if no match.
+T}
+\*(FCSUBSEP\fP	T{
+character(s) used to separate multiple subscripts
+in array elements, by default \*(FC"\e034"\*(FR. (see
+\fHArrays\fP below).\*(CX
+T}
+.TE
+.EB \s+2\f(HBVARIABLES\*(FR\s0
+
+.BT
+
+.\" --- Arrays
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDAn arrays subscript is an expression between square brackets
+(\*(FC[ \*(FRand \*(FC]\*(FR).
+If the expression is a list
+\*(FC(\*(FIexpr\*(FC, \*(FIexpr \*(FC...)\*(FR,
+then the subscript is a string consisting of the
+concatenation of the (string) value of each expression,
+separated by the value of the \*(FCSUBSEP\fP variable.
+This simulates multi-dimensional
+arrays. For example:
+.nf
+.sp .5
+	\*(FCi = "A";\^ j = "B";\^ k = "C"
+	x[i, j, k] = "hello, world\en"\*(FR
+.sp .5
+.fi
+assigns \*(FC"hello, world\en"\*(FR to the element of the array
+\*(FCx\fP
+indexed by the string \*(FC"A\e034B\e034C"\*(FR. All arrays in AWK
+are associative, i.e., indexed by string values.
+.sp .5
+Use the special operator \*(FCin\fP in an \*(FCif\fP
+or \*(FCwhile\fP statement to see if a particular value is
+an array index.
+.sp .5
+.nf
+	\*(FCif (val in array)
+		print array[val]\*(FR
+.sp .5
+.fi
+If the array has multiple subscripts, use
+\*(FC(i, j) in array\*(FR.
+.sp .5
+Use the \*(FCin\fP construct in a \*(FCfor\fP
+loop to iterate over all the elements of an array.
+.sp .5
+Use the \*(FCdelete\fP statement to delete an
+element from an array.
+\*(CLSpecifying just the array name without a subscript in
+the \*(FCdelete\fP
+statement deletes the entire contents of an array.\*(CX
+.EB \s+2\f(HBARRAYS\*(FR\s0
+
+.\" --- Expressions
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDExpressions are used as patterns, for controlling conditional action
+statements, and to produce parameter values when calling functions.
+Expressions may also be used as simple statements,
+particularly if they have side-effects such as assignment.
+Expressions mix \*(FIoperands\fP and \*(FIoperators\fP. Operands are
+constants, fields, variables, array elements, and the return
+values from function calls (both built-in and user-defined).
+.sp .5
+Regexp constants (\*(FC/\*(FIpat\*(FC/\*(FR), when used as simple expressions,
+i.e., not used on the right-hand side of
+\*(FC~\fP and \*(FC!~\fP, or as arguments to the
+\*(CB\*(FCgensub()\fP,\*(CD
+\*(FCgsub()\fP,
+\*(FCmatch()\fP,
+\*(FCsplit()\fP,
+and
+\*(FCsub()\fP,
+functions, mean \*(FC$0 ~ /\*(FIpat\*(FC/\*(FR.
+.sp .5
+The AWK operators, in order of decreasing precedence, are
+.sp .5
+.fi
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(1.8i).
+\*(FC(\&...)\*(FR	grouping
+\*(FC$\fP	field reference
+\*(FC++ \-\^\-\fP	T{
+increment and decrement,
+prefix and postfix
+T}
+\*(FC^\fP \*(CL\*(FC**\*(FR\*(CD	exponentiation
+\*(FC+ \- !\fP	unary plus, unary minus, and logical negation
+\*(FC* / %\fP	multiplication, division, and modulus
+\*(FC+ \-\fP	addition and subtraction
+\*(FIspace\fP	string concatenation
+\*(FC< >\fP	less than, greater than
+\*(FC<= >=\fP	less than or equal, greater than or equal
+\*(FC!= ==\fP	not equal, equal
+\*(FC~ !~\fP	regular expression match, negated match
+\*(FCin\fP	array membership
+\*(FC&&\fP	logical AND, short circuit
+\*(FC||\fP	logical OR, short circuit
+\*(FC?\^:\fP	in-line conditional expression
+.T&
+l s
+l lw(1.8i).
+\*(FC=\0+=\0\-=\0*=\0/=\0%=\0^=\0\*(CL**=\*(CD\fP
+	assignment operators\*(CX
+.TE
+.EB \s+2\f(HBEXPRESSIONS\*(FR\s0
+
+
+.BT
+
+.\" --- Conversions and Comparisons
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDVariables and fields may be (floating point) numbers, strings or both.
+Context determines how the value of a variable is interpreted. If used in
+a numeric expression, it will be treated as a number, if used as a string
+it will be treated as a string.
+.sp .5
+To force a variable to be treated as a number, add 0 to it; to force it
+to be treated as a string, concatenate it with the null string.
+.sp .5
+When a string must be converted to a number, the conversion is accomplished
+using \*(FIatof\*(FR(3).
+A number is converted to a string by using the value of \*(FCCONVFMT\fP
+as a format string for \*(FIsprintf\*(FR(3),
+with the numeric value of the variable as the argument.
+However, even though all numbers in AWK are floating-point,
+integral values are \*(FIalways\fP converted as integers.
+.sp .5
+Comparisons are performed as follows:
+If two variables are numeric, they are compared numerically.
+If one value is numeric and the other has a string value that is a
+``numeric string,'' then comparisons are also done numerically.
+Otherwise, the numeric value is converted to a string, and a string
+comparison is performed.
+Two strings are compared, of course, as strings.
+\*(CRAccording to the POSIX standard, even if two strings are
+numeric strings, a numeric comparison is performed. However, this is
+clearly incorrect, and none of the three free \*(AK\*(FRs do this.\*(CD
+.sp .5
+Note that string constants, such as \*(FC"57"\fP, are \*(FInot\fP
+numeric strings, they are string constants. The idea of ``numeric string''
+only applies to fields, \*(FCgetline\fP input,
+\*(FCFILENAME\*(FR, \*(FCARGV\fP elements, \*(FCENVIRON\fP
+elements and the elements of an array created by
+\*(FCsplit()\fP that are numeric strings.
+The basic idea is that \*(FIuser input\*(FR,
+and only user input, that looks numeric,
+should be treated that way.
+.sp .5
+Uninitialized variables have the numeric value 0 and the string value
+\*(FC"\^"\fP
+(the null, or empty, string).\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBCONVERSIONS AND COMPARISONS\*(FR\s0"
+
+.ig
+.\" --- Localization
+.ES
+.nf
+.ce 100
+\*(CDThis
+section
+is
+under
+construction.
+.sp .5
+This
+section
+is
+under
+construction.\*(CB
+.ce 0
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBLOCALIZATION\*(FR\s0"
+..
+
+.ig
+.ps +2
+.ce 1
+\*(CD\fHISBN: 0-916151-97-2\*(FR
+.ps -2
+..
+
+.BT
+
+
+.\" --- Input Control
+.ES
+.fi
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(1.8i).
+\*(CD\*(FCclose(\*(FIfile\*(FC)\*(FR	close input file or pipe.
+\*(FCgetline\fP	T{
+set \*(FC$0\fP from next input record;
+set \*(FCNF\*(FR, \*(FCNR\*(FR, \*(FCFNR\*(FR.
+T}
+\*(FCgetline < \*(FIfile\*(FR	set \*(FC$0\fP from next record of \*(FIfile\*(FR; set \*(FCNF\*(FR.
+\*(FCgetline \*(FIv\*(FR	T{
+set \*(FIv\fP from next input record;
+set \*(FCNR\*(FR, \*(FCFNR\*(FR.
+T}
+\*(FCgetline \*(FIv \*(FC< \*(FIfile\*(FR	set \*(FIv\fP from next record of \*(FIfile\*(FR.
+\*(FIcmd \*(FC| getline\*(FR	pipe into \*(FCgetline\*(FR; set \*(FC$0\*(FR, \*(FCNF\*(FR.
+\*(FIcmd \*(FC| getline \*(FIv\*(FR	pipe into \*(FCgetline\*(FR; set \*(FIv\*(FR.
+.TE
+.fi
+.in +.2i
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCnext\fP
+.br
+stop processing the current input
+record. Read next input record and
+start over with the first pattern in the
+program. Upon end of the input data,
+execute any \*(FCEND\fP rule(s).
+.br
+.ti -.2i
+\*(CL\*(FCnextfile\fP
+.br
+stop processing the current input file.
+The next input record comes from the
+next input file. \*(FCFILENAME\fP \*(CBand
+\*(FCARGIND\fP\*(CL are updated, \*(FCFNR\fP is reset to 1,
+and processing starts over with the first
+pattern in the AWK program. Upon end
+of input data, execute any \*(FCEND\fP rule(s).
+\*(CREarlier versions of \*(GK used
+\*(FCnext file\*(FR, as two words. This
+generates a warning message and will
+eventually be removed. \*(CR\*(MK does not
+currently support \*(FCnextfile\*(FR.\*(CD
+.in -.2i
+.sp .5
+.fi
+\*(FCgetline\*(FR returns 0 on end of file, and \-1 on an
+error.\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBINPUT CONTROL\*(FR\s0"
+
+.\" --- Output Control
+.ES
+.fi
+.in +.2i
+.ti -.2i
+\*(CD\*(FCclose(\*(FIfile\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+close output file or pipe.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(CL\*(FCfflush(\*(FR[\*(FIfile\^\*(FR]\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+flush any buffers associated
+with the open output file or pipe \*(FIfile\*(FR.\*(CD
+\*(CBIf \*(FIfile\fP is missing, then standard output is flushed.
+If \*(FIfile\fP is the null string, then all open output files and pipes
+are flushed \*(CR(not \*(NK)\*(CD.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCprint\fP
+.br
+print the current record. The output record is terminated
+with the value of \*(FCORS\fP.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCprint \*(FIexpr-list\*(FR
+.br
+print expressions. Each expression is separated
+by the value of \*(FCOFS\fP. The output record is
+terminated with the value of \*(FCORS\fP.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCprintf \*(FIfmt\*(FC, \*(FIexpr-list\*(FR
+.br
+format and print (see \fHPrintf Formats\fP below).
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCsystem(\*(FIcmd\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+execute the command \*(FIcmd\*(FR,
+and return the exit status
+\*(CR(may not be available on non-POSIX systems)\*(CD.
+.sp .5
+.in -.2i
+I/O redirections may be used with both \*(FCprint\fP and \*(FCprintf\fP.
+.sp .5
+.in +.2i
+.ti -.2i
+\*(CD\*(FCprint "hello" > \*(FIfile\*(FR
+.br
+Print data to \*(FIfile\fP. The first time the file is written to, it
+will be truncated. Subsequent commands append data.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCprint "hello" >> \*(FIfile\*(FR
+.br
+Append data to \*(FIfile\fP. The previous contents of the file are not lost.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCprint "hello" | \*(FIcmd\*(FR
+.br
+Print data down a pipeline to \*(FIcmd\*(FR.\*(CX
+.in -.2i
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBOUTPUT CONTROL\*(FR\s0"
+
+.BT
+
+
+.\" --- Printf Formats
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDThe \*(FCprintf\fP statement and
+\*(FCsprintf()\fP function
+accept the following conversion specification formats:
+.sp .5
+.nf
+\*(FC%c\fP		an \s-1ASCII\s+1 character
+\*(FC%d\fP		a decimal number (the integer part)
+\*(FC%i\fP		a decimal number (the integer part)
+\*(FC%e\fP		a floating point number of the form
+		\*(FC[\-]d.dddddde[+\^\-]dd\*(FR
+\*(FC%E\fP		like \*(FC%e\fP, but use \*(FCE\fP instead of \*(FCe\*(FR
+\*(FC%f\fP		a floating point number of the form
+		\*(FC[\-]ddd.dddddd\*(FR
+\*(FC%g\fP		use \*(FC%e\fP or \*(FC%f\fP, whichever is shorter, with
+		nonsignificant zeros suppressed
+\*(FC%G\fP		like \*(FC%g\fP, but use \*(FC%E\fP instead of \*(FC%e\*(FR
+\*(FC%o\fP		an unsigned octal integer
+\*(FC%u\fP		an unsigned decimal integer
+\*(FC%s\fP		a character string
+\*(FC%x\fP		an unsigned hexadecimal integer
+\*(FC%X\fP		like \*(FC%x\fP, but use \*(FCABCDEF\fP for 10\(en15
+\*(FC%%\fP		A literal \*(FC%\fP; no argument is converted
+.sp .5
+.fi
+Optional, additional parameters may lie between the \*(FC%\fP
+and the control letter:
+.sp .5
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(2.2i).
+\*(FC\-\fP	T{
+left-justify the expression within its field.
+T}
+\*(FIspace\fP	T{
+for numeric conversions, prefix positive values
+with a space and negative values with a
+minus sign.
+T}
+\*(FC+\fP	T{
+used before the \*(FIwidth\fP modifier means to always
+supply a sign for numeric conversions, even if
+the data to be formatted is positive. The \*(FC+\fP
+overrides the space modifier.
+T}
+\*(FC#\fP	T{
+use an ``alternate form'' for some control letters.
+T}
+ \*(FC%o\*(FR	T{
+supply a leading zero.
+T}
+ \*(FC%x\*(FR, \*(FC%X\*(FR	T{
+supply a leading \*(FC0x\*(FR or \*(FC0X\*(FR for a nonzero result.
+T}
+ \*(FC%e\*(FR, \*(FC%E\*(FR, \*(FC%f\*(FR	T{
+the result always has a decimal point.
+T}
+ \*(FC%g\*(FR, \*(FC%G\*(FR	T{
+trailing zeros are not removed.
+T}
+\*(FC0\fP	T{
+a leading zero acts as a flag, indicating output
+should be padded with zeroes instead of spaces.
+This applies even to non-numeric output formats.
+Only has an effect when the field width is wider
+than the value to be printed.
+T}
+\*(FIwidth\fP	T{
+pad the field to this width. The field is normally
+padded with spaces. If the \*(FC0\fP flag has been used,
+pad with zeroes.
+T}
+\*(FC.\fP\*(FIprec\fP	T{
+precision.
+The meaning varies by control letter:
+T}
+ \*(FC%d\*(FR, \*(FC%o\*(FR, \*(FC%i\*(FR,
+ \*(FC%u\*(FR, \*(FC%x\*(FR, \*(FC%X\fP	T{
+the minimum number of digits to print.
+T}
+ \*(FC%e\*(FR, \*(FC%E\*(FR, \*(FC%f\*(FR	T{
+the number of digits to print to the right of the decimal point.
+T}
+ \*(FC%g\*(FR, \*(FC%G\fP	T{
+the maximum number of significant digits.
+T}
+ \*(FC%s\fP	T{
+the maximum number of characters to print.
+T}
+.TE
+.sp .5
+.fi
+The dynamic \*(FIwidth\fP and \*(FIprec\fP capabilities of the ANSI C
+\*(FCprintf()\fP routines are supported.
+A \*(FC*\fP in place of either the \*(FIwidth\fP or \*(FIprec\fP
+specifications will cause their values to be taken from
+the argument list to \*(FCprintf\fP or \*(FCsprintf()\*(FR.\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBPRINTF FORMATS\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+
+.BT
+
+.\" --- Special Filenames
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDWhen doing I/O redirection from either \*(FCprint\fP
+or \*(FCprintf\fP into a file or via \*(FCgetline\fP
+from a file, all three implementations of \*(FCawk\fP
+recognize certain special filenames internally. These filenames
+allow access to open file descriptors inherited from the
+parent process (usually the shell).
+These filenames may also be used on the command line to name data files.
+The filenames are:
+.sp .5
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(2i).
+\*(FC"\-"\fP	standard input
+\*(FC/dev/stdin\fP	standard input \*(CR(not \*(MK)\*(CD
+\*(FC/dev/stdout\fP	standard output
+\*(FC/dev/stderr\fP	standard error output
+.TE
+.sp .5
+.fi
+\*(CBThe following names are specific to \*(GK.
+.sp .5
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(2i).
+\*(FC/dev/fd/\^\*(FIn\*(FR	T{
+file associated with the open file descriptor \*(FIn\*(FR
+T}
+.TE
+.sp .5
+.fi
+Other special filenames provide access to information about the running
+\*(FCgawk\fP process.
+Reading from these files returns a single record.
+The filenames and what they return are:\*(FR
+.sp .5
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(2i).
+\*(FC/dev/pid\fP	process ID of current process
+\*(FC/dev/ppid\fP	parent process ID of current process
+\*(FC/dev/pgrpid\fP	process group ID of current process
+\*(FC/dev/user\fP	T{
+.nf
+a single newline-terminated record.
+The fields are separated with spaces.
+\*(FC$1\fP is the return value of \*(FIgetuid\*(FR(2),
+\*(FC$2\fP is the return value of \*(FIgeteuid\*(FR(2),
+\*(FC$3\fP is the return value of \*(FIgetgid\*(FR(2) , and
+\*(FC$4\fP is the return value of \*(FIgetegid\*(FR(2).
+.fi
+Any additional fields are the group IDs returned
+by \*(FIgetgroups\*(FR(2). Multiple groups may not be
+supported on all systems.
+T}
+.TE
+.sp .5
+.fi
+.ig
+\*(CRThese filenames are now obsolete.
+Use the \*(FCPROCINFO\fP array to obtain the information they provide.\*(CL
+..
+.\" BEGIN FOR 3.0.x
+\*(CRThese filenames will become obsolete in \*(GK 3.1.
+Be aware that you will have to change your programs.\*(CL
+.\" END FOR 3.0.x
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBSPECIAL FILENAMES\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+
+
+.\" --- Builtin Numeric Functions
+.ES
+.fi
+.TS
+expand;
+l lw(2i).
+\*(CD\*(FCatan2(\*(FIy\*(FC, \*(FIx\*(FC)\*(FR	the arctangent of \*(FIy/x\fP in radians.
+\*(FCcos(\*(FIexpr\*(FC)\*(FR	the cosine of \*(FIexpr\fP, which is in radians.
+\*(FCexp(\*(FIexpr\*(FC)\*(FR	the exponential function (\*(FIe \*(FC^ \*(FIx\*(FR).
+\*(FCint(\*(FIexpr\*(FC)\*(FR	truncates to integer.
+\*(FClog(\*(FIexpr\*(FC)\*(FR	the natural logarithm function (base \*(FIe\^\*(FR).
+\*(FCrand()\fP	a random number between 0 and 1.
+\*(FCsin(\*(FIexpr\*(FC)\*(FR	the sine of \*(FIexpr\fP, which is in radians.
+\*(FCsqrt(\*(FIexpr\*(FC)\*(FR	the square root function.
+\&\*(FCsrand(\*(FR[\*(FIexpr\^\*(FR]\*(FC)\*(FR	T{
+uses \*(FIexpr\fP as a new seed for the random number
+generator. If no \*(FIexpr\fP, the time of day is used.
+Returns previous seed for the random number
+generator.\*(CX
+T}
+.TE
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBNUMERIC FUNCTIONS\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+.BT
+
+
+.\" --- Builtin String Functions
+.ES
+.fi
+.in +.2i
+.ti -.2i
+\*(CB\*(FCgensub(\*(FIr\*(FC, \*(FIs\*(FC, \*(FIh \*(FR[\*(FC, \*(FIt\*(FR]\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+search the target string
+\*(FIt\fP for matches of the regular expression \*(FIr\*(FR. If
+\*(FIh\fP is a string beginning with \*(FCg\fP or \*(FCG\*(FR,
+replace all matches of \*(FIr\fP with \*(FIs\*(FR. Otherwise, \*(FIh\fP
+is a number indicating which match of \*(FIr\fP to replace. If no
+\*(FIt\fP is supplied, \*(FC$0\fP is used instead. Within the
+replacement text \*(FIs\*(FR, the sequence \*(FC\e\*(FIn\*(FR,
+where \*(FIn\fP is a digit from 1 to 9, may be used to indicate just
+the text that matched the \*(FIn\*(FRth parenthesized subexpression.
+The sequence \*(FC\e0\fP represents the entire matched text, as does
+the character \*(FC&\*(FR. Unlike \*(FCsub()\fP and \*(FCgsub()\*(FR,
+the modified string is returned as the result of the function,
+and the original target string is \*(FInot\fP changed.\*(CD
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCgsub(\*(FIr\*(FC, \*(FIs \*(FR[\*(FC, \*(FIt\*(FR]\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+for each substring matching the
+regular expression \*(FIr\fP in the string \*(FIt\*(FR, substitute the
+string \*(FIs\*(FR, and return the number of substitutions. If
+\*(FIt\fP is not supplied, use \*(FC$0\*(FR. An \*(FC&\fP in the
+replacement text is replaced with the text that was actually matched.
+Use \*(FC\e&\fP to get a literal \*(FC&\*(FR. See \*(AM
+for a fuller discussion of the rules for \*(FC&\*(FR's and backslashes
+in the replacement text of \*(CB\*(FCgensub()\*(FR,\*(CD \*(FCsub()\*(FR
+and \*(FCgsub()\*(FR
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCindex(\*(FIs\*(FC, \*(FIt\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+returns the index of the string
+\*(FIt\fP in the string \*(FIs\*(FR, or 0 if \*(FIt\fP is not present.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FClength(\*(FR[\*(FIs\*(FR]\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+returns the length of the string
+\*(FIs\*(FR, or the length of \*(FC$0\fP if \*(FIs\fP is not supplied.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCmatch(\*(FIs\*(FC, \*(FIr\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+returns the position in
+\*(FIs\fP where the regular expression \*(FIr\fP occurs, or 0 if
+\*(FIr\fP is not present, and sets the values of variables
+\*(FCRSTART\fP
+and \*(FCRLENGTH\*(FR.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCsplit(\*(FIs\*(FC, \*(FIa \*(FR[\*(FC, \*(FIr\*(FR]\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+splits the string
+\*(FIs\fP into the array \*(FIa\fP using the regular expression \*(FIr\*(FR,
+and returns the number of fields. If \*(FIr\fP is omitted, \*(FCFS\fP
+is used instead. The array \*(FIa\fP is cleared first.
+Splitting behaves identically to field splitting.
+(See \fHFields\fP, above.)
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCsprintf(\*(FIfmt\*(FC, \*(FIexpr-list\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+prints \*(FIexpr-list\fP
+according to \*(FIfmt\*(FR, and returns the resulting string.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCsub(\*(FIr\*(FC, \*(FIs \*(FR[\*(FC, \*(FIt\*(FR]\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+just like
+\*(FCgsub()\*(FR, but only the first matching substring is replaced.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCsubstr(\*(FIs\*(FC, \*(FIi \*(FR[\*(FC, \*(FIn\*(FR]\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+returns the at most
+\*(FIn\*(FR-character substring of \*(FIs\fP starting at \*(FIi\*(FR.
+If \*(FIn\fP is omitted, the rest of \*(FIs\fP is used.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCtolower(\*(FIstr\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+returns a copy of the string \*(FIstr\*(FR,
+with all the upper-case characters in \*(FIstr\fP translated to their
+corresponding lower-case counterparts. Non-alphabetic characters are
+left unchanged.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCtoupper(\*(FIstr\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+returns a copy of the string \*(FIstr\*(FR,
+with all the lower-case characters in \*(FIstr\fP translated to their
+corresponding upper-case counterparts. Non-alphabetic characters are
+left unchanged.\*(CX
+.in -.2i
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBSTRING FUNCTIONS\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+
+.BT
+
+
+.\" --- Builtin Time Functions
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CD\*(GK
+provides the following functions for obtaining time stamps and
+formatting them.
+.sp .5
+.fi
+.in +.2i
+.ig
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCmktime(\*(FIdatespec\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+turns \*(FIdatespec\fP into a time
+stamp of the same form as returned by \*(FCsystime()\*(FR.
+The \*(FIdatespec\fP is a string of the form
+\*(FC"\*(FIYYYY MM DD HH MM SS\*(FC"\*(FR.
+..
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCstrftime(\*(FR[\*(FIformat \*(FR[\*(FC, \*(FItimestamp\*(FR]]\*(FC)\*(FR
+.br
+formats \*(FItimestamp\fP
+according to the specification in \*(FIformat\*(FR. The
+\*(FItimestamp\fP should be of the same form as returned by
+\*(FCsystime()\*(FR.
+If \*(FItimestamp\fP is missing, the current time of day is used. If
+\*(FIformat\fP is missing, a default format equivalent to the output
+of \*(FIdate\*(FR(1) will be used.
+.ti -.2i
+\*(FCsystime()\fP
+.br
+returns the current time of day as the number of
+seconds since the Epoch.\*(CB
+.in -.2i
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBTIME FUNCTIONS (\*(GK\f(HB)\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+
+.\" --- User-defined Functions
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDFunctions in AWK are defined as follows:
+.sp .5
+.nf
+	\*(FCfunction \*(FIname\*(FC(\*(FIparameter list\*(FC)
+	{
+		\*(FIstatements
+	\*(FC}\*(FR
+.sp .5
+.fi
+Functions are executed when they are called from within expressions
+in either patterns or actions. Actual parameters supplied in the function
+call instantiate the formal parameters declared in the function.
+Arrays are passed by reference, other variables are passed by value.
+.sp .5
+Local variables are declared as extra parameters
+in the parameter list. The convention is to separate local variables from
+real parameters by extra spaces in the parameter list. For example:
+.sp .5
+.nf
+	\*(FC# a & b are local
+	function f(p, q,     a, b)
+	{
+		\&.....
+	}
+.sp .3
+	/abc/	{ ... ; f(1, 2) ; ... }\*(FR
+.fi
+.sp .5
+The left parenthesis in a function call is required
+to immediately follow the function name
+without any intervening white space.
+This is to avoid a syntactic ambiguity with the concatenation operator.
+This restriction does not apply to the built-in functions.
+.sp .5
+Functions may call each other and may be recursive.
+Function parameters used as local variables are initialized
+to the null string and the number zero upon function invocation.
+.sp .5
+Use \*(FCreturn\fP to return a value from a function. The return value
+is undefined if no value is provided, or if the function returns by
+``falling off'' the end.
+.sp .5
+\*(CLThe word
+\*(FCfunc\fP
+may be used in place of
+\*(FCfunction\*(FR.
+\*(CRNote: This usage is deprecated.\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBUSER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+
+.\" --- Bug Reports
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDIf you find a bug in this reference card, please report it via electronic
+mail to \*(FCarnold@gnu.org\*(FR.\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBBUG REPORTS\*(FR\s0"
+
+.BT
+
+.\" --- Environment Variables
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDThe environment variable \*(FCAWKPATH\fP specifies a search path to use
+when finding source files named with the \*(FC\-f\fP
+option.
+The default path is
+\*(FC".:/usr/local/share/awk"\*(FR,
+if this variable does not exist.
+(The actual directory may vary,
+depending upon how \*(GK was built and installed.)
+If a file name given to the \*(FC\-f\fP option contains a ``/'' character,
+no path search is performed.
+.sp .5
+If \*(FCPOSIXLY_CORRECT\fP exists in the environment, then \*(GK
+behaves exactly as if \*(FC\-\^\-posix\fP had been specified on the
+command line.\*(CB
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBENVIRONMENT VARIABLES (\*(GK\f(HB)\*(FR\s0"
+
+.\" --- Historical Features
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CD\*(GK supports two features of historical AWK implementations.
+First, it is possible to call the \*(FClength()\fP
+built-in function not only with no argument, but even without parentheses.
+This feature is marked as ``deprecated'' in the POSIX standard, and \*(GK
+will issue a warning about its use if \*(FC\-\^\-lint\fP
+is specified on the command line.
+.sp .5
+The other feature is the use of \*(FCcontinue\fP
+or \*(FCbreak\fP statements outside the body of a
+\*(FCwhile\*(FR, \*(FCfor\*(FR, or \*(FCdo\fP loop.
+Historical AWK implementations have treated such usage as
+equivalent to the \*(FCnext\fP statement.
+\*(GK will support this usage if \*(FC\-\^\-traditional\fP
+has been specified.\*(CB
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBHISTORICAL FEATURES (\*(GK\f(HB)\*(FR\s0"
+
+
+.\" --- FTP Information
+.ES
+.nf
+\*(CDHost: \*(FCgnudist.gnu.org\*(FR
+File: \*(FC/gnu/gawk/gawk-3.0.6.tar.gz\fP
+.in +.2i
+.fi
+GNU \*(AK (\*(GK). There may be a later version.
+.in -.2i
+.nf
+.sp .5
+Host: \*(FCnetlib.bell-labs.com\*(FR
+File: \*(FC/netlib/research/awk.bundle.gz\fP
+.in +.2i
+.fi
+\*(NK. This version requires an ANSI C compiler;
+GCC (the GNU C compiler) works well.
+.in -.2i
+.nf
+.sp .5
+Host: \*(FCftp.whidbey.net\*(FR
+File: \*(FC/pub/brennan/mawk1.3.3.tar.gz\fP
+.in +.2i
+.fi
+Michael Brennan's \*(MK. There may be a newer version.\*(CX
+.in -.2i
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBFTP INFORMATION\*(FR\s0"
+
+.\" --- Copying Permissions
+.ES
+.fi
+\*(CDCopyright \(co 1996-2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.sp .5   
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+reference card provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+.sp .5
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+reference card under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+.sp .5
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+reference card into another language, under the above conditions for
+modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a
+translation approved by the Foundation.\*(CX
+.EB "\s+2\f(HBCOPYING PERMISSIONS\*(FR\s0"
+.BT
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/awkforai.txt b/contrib/awk/doc/awkforai.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3fca320
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/awkforai.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+Draft for ACM SIGPLAN Patterns (Language Trends)
+
+1996
+
+Why GAWK for AI?
+
+Ronald P. Loui
+
+Most people are surprised when I tell them what language we use in our
+undergraduate AI programming class.  That's understandable.  We use
+GAWK.  GAWK, Gnu's version of Aho, Weinberger, and Kernighan's old
+pattern scanning language isn't even viewed as a programming language by
+most people.  Like PERL and TCL, most prefer to view it as a "scripting
+language."  It has no objects; it is not functional; it does no built-in
+logic programming.  Their surprise turns to puzzlement when I confide
+that (a) while the students are allowed to use any language they want;
+(b) with a single exception, the best work consistently results from
+those working in GAWK.  (footnote:  The exception was a PASCAL
+programmer who is now an NSF graduate fellow getting a Ph.D. in
+mathematics at Harvard.) Programmers in C, C++, and LISP haven't even
+been close (we have not seen work in PROLOG or JAVA).
+
+Why GAWK?
+
+There are some quick answers that have to do with the pragmatics of
+undergraduate programming.  Then there are more instructive answers that
+might be valuable to those who debate programming paradigms or to those
+who study the history of AI languages.  And there are some deep
+philosophical answers that expose the nature of reasoning and symbolic
+AI.  I think the answers, especially the last ones, can be even more
+surprising than the observed effectiveness of GAWK for AI.
+
+First it must be confessed that PERL programmers can cobble together AI
+projects well, too.  Most of GAWK's attractiveness is reproduced in
+PERL, and the success of PERL forebodes some of the success of GAWK.
+Both are powerful string-processing languages that allow the programmer
+to exploit many of the features of a UNIX environment.  Both provide
+powerful constructions for manipulating a wide variety of data in
+reasonably efficient ways.  Both are interpreted, which can reduce
+development time.  Both have short learning curves.  The GAWK manual can
+be consumed in a single lab session and the language can be mastered by
+the next morning by the average student.  GAWK's automatic
+initialization, implicit coercion, I/O support and lack of pointers
+forgive many of the mistakes that young programmers are likely to make.
+Those who have seen C but not mastered it are happy to see that GAWK
+retains some of the same sensibilities while adding what must be
+regarded as spoonsful of syntactic sugar.  Some will argue that
+PERL has superior functionality, but for quick AI applications, the
+additional functionality is rarely missed.  In fact, PERL's terse syntax
+is not friendly when regular expressions begin to proliferate and
+strings contain fragments of HTML, WWW addresses, or shell commands.
+PERL provides new ways of doing things, but not necessarily ways of
+doing new things.
+
+In the end, despite minor difference, both PERL and GAWK minimize
+programmer time.  Neither really provides the programmer the setting in
+which to worry about minimizing run-time.
+
+There are further simple answers.  Probably the best is the fact that
+increasingly, undergraduate AI programming is involving the Web.  Oren
+Etzioni (University of Washington, Seattle) has for a while been arguing
+that the "softbot" is replacing the mechanical engineers' robot as the
+most glamorous AI testbed.  If the artifact whose behavior needs to be
+controlled in an intelligent way is the software agent, then a language
+that is well-suited to controlling the software environment is the
+appropriate language.  That would imply a scripting language.  If the
+robot is KAREL, then the right language is "turn left; turn right." If
+the robot is Netscape, then the right language is something that can
+generate "netscape -remote 'openURL(http://cs.wustl.edu/~loui)'" with
+elan.
+
+Of course, there are deeper answers.  Jon Bentley found two pearls in
+GAWK:  its regular expressions and its associative arrays.  GAWK asks
+the programmer to use the file system for data organization and the
+operating system for debugging tools and subroutine libraries.  There is
+no issue of user-interface.  This forces the programmer to return to the
+question of what the program does, not how it looks.  There is no time
+spent programming a binsort when the data can be shipped to /bin/sort
+in no time.  (footnote:  I am reminded of my IBM colleague Ben Grosof's
+advice for Palo Alto:  Don't worry about whether it's highway 101 or 280.
+Don't worry if you have to head south for an entrance to go north.  Just
+get on the highway as quickly as possible.)
+
+There are some similarities between GAWK and LISP that are illuminating.
+Both provided a powerful uniform data structure (the associative array
+implemented as a hash table for GAWK and the S-expression, or list of
+lists, for LISP).  Both were well-supported in their environments (GAWK
+being a child of UNIX, and LISP being the heart of lisp machines).  Both
+have trivial syntax and find their power in the programmer's willingness
+to use the simple blocks to build a complex approach.
+
+Deeper still, is the nature of AI programming.  AI is about
+functionality and exploratory programming.  It is about bottom-up design
+and the building of ambitions as greater behaviors can be demonstrated.
+Woe be to the top-down AI programmer who finds that the bottom-level
+refinements, "this subroutine parses the sentence," cannot actually be
+implemented.  Woe be to the programmer who perfects the data structures
+for that heapsort when the whole approach to the high-level problem
+needs to be rethought, and the code is sent to the junkheap the next day.
+
+AI programming requires high-level thinking.  There have always been a few
+gifted programmers who can write high-level programs in assembly language.
+Most however need the ambient abstraction to have a higher floor.  
+
+Now for the surprising philosophical answers.  First, AI has discovered
+that brute-force combinatorics, as an approach to generating intelligent
+behavior, does not often provide the solution.  Chess, neural nets, and
+genetic programming show the limits of brute computation.  The
+alternative is clever program organization.  (footnote: One might add
+that the former are the AI approaches that work, but that is easily
+dismissed:  those are the AI approaches that work in general, precisely
+because cleverness is problem-specific.)  So AI programmers always want
+to maximize the content of their program, not optimize the efficiency
+of an approach.  They want minds, not insects.  Instead of enumerating
+large search spaces, they define ways of reducing search, ways of
+bringing different knowledge to the task.  A language that maximizes
+what the programmer can attempt rather than one that provides tremendous
+control over how to attempt it, will be the AI choice in the end.
+
+Second, inference is merely the expansion of notation.  No matter whether
+the logic that underlies an AI program is fuzzy, probabilistic, deontic,
+defeasible, or deductive, the logic merely defines how strings can be 
+transformed into other strings.  A language that provides the best
+support for string processing in the end provides the best support for
+logic, for the exploration of various logics, and for most forms of
+symbolic processing that AI might choose to call "reasoning" instead of
+"logic."  The implication is that PROLOG, which saves the AI programmer
+from having to write a unifier, saves perhaps two dozen lines of GAWK
+code at the expense of strongly biasing the logic and representational
+expressiveness of any approach.
+
+I view these last two points as news not only to the programming language
+community, but also to much of the AI community that has not reflected on
+the past decade's lessons.
+
+In the puny language, GAWK, which Aho, Weinberger, and Kernighan thought
+not much more important than grep or sed, I find lessons in AI's trends,
+AI's history, and the foundations of AI.  What I have found not only
+surprising but also hopeful, is that when I have approached the AI
+people who still enjoy programming, some of them are not the least bit
+surprised.
+
+
+R. Loui (loui@ai.wustl.edu) is Associate Professor of Computer Science,
+at Washington University in St. Louis.  He has published in AI Journal,
+Computational Intelligence, ACM SIGART, AI Magazine, AI and Law, the ACM
+Computing Surveys Symposium on AI, Cognitive Science, Minds and
+Machines, Journal of Philosophy, and is on this year's program
+committees for AAAI (National AI conference) and KR (Knowledge
+Representation and Reasoning).
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/cardfonts b/contrib/awk/doc/cardfonts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5529ba9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/cardfonts
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+.\" AWK Reference Card --- Arnold Robbins, arnold@gnu.org
+.\" cardfonts --- this file sets the fonts to use for the reference card
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+.\" this reference card provided the copyright notice and this permission
+.\" notice are preserved on all copies.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to process this file through troff and print the
+.\" results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+.\" notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+.\" (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed reference card).
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+.\" reference card under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+.\" permission notice identical to this one.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+.\" reference card into another language, under the above conditions for
+.\" modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in
+.\" a translation approved by the Foundation.
+.\"
+.ig
+Strings for inline font change.
+FR - font roman
+FI - font italic
+FC - font courier
+..
+.ds FR \fR
+.ds FI \fI
+.ds FC \f(CB
+.ds RN Times Roman
+.ds IN Times Italic
+.ds CN Courier Bold
+.ds AM \fIThe GNU Awk User's Guide\fP
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/colors b/contrib/awk/doc/colors
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..933d25e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/colors
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+.\" AWK Reference Card --- Arnold Robbins, arnold@gnu.org
+.\" This file sets the colors to use.
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 1996,97,99 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+.\" this reference card provided the copyright notice and this permission
+.\" notice are preserved on all copies.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to process this file through troff and print the
+.\" results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+.\" notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+.\" (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed reference card).
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+.\" reference card under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+.\" permission notice identical to this one.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+.\" reference card into another language, under the above conditions for
+.\" modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in
+.\" a translation approved by the Foundation.
+.\"
+.ig
+Strings for inline color change.
+CR - color red
+CG - color green
+CL - color light blue
+CB - color blue
+CD - color dark, i.e. black
+CX - color boX, i.e. for the surrounding boxes (red for now)
+..
+.ds CR \X'ps: exec 0 .96 .65 0 setcmykcolor'
+.ds CG \X'ps: exec 1.0 0 .51 .43 setcmykcolor'
+.ds CL \X'ps: exec .69 .34 0 0 setcmykcolor'
+.ds CB \X'ps: exec 1 .72 0 .06 setcmykcolor'
+.ds CD \X'ps: exec 1 1 1 1 setcmykcolor'
+.ds CX \*(CG
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/gawk.1 b/contrib/awk/doc/gawk.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f07cfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/gawk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,2657 @@
+.ds PX \s-1POSIX\s+1
+.ds UX \s-1UNIX\s+1
+.ds AN \s-1ANSI\s+1
+.ds GN \s-1GNU\s+1
+.ds AK \s-1AWK\s+1
+.if !\n(.g \{\
+.	if !\w|\*(lq| \{\
+.		ds lq ``
+.		if \w'\(lq' .ds lq "\(lq
+.	\}
+.	if !\w|\*(rq| \{\
+.		ds rq ''
+.		if \w'\(rq' .ds rq "\(rq
+.	\}
+.\}
+.TH GAWK 1 "May 17 2000" "Free Software Foundation" "Utility Commands"
+.SH NAME
+gawk \- pattern scanning and processing language
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B gawk
+[ \*(PX or \*(GN style options ]
+.B \-f
+.I program-file
+[
+.B \-\^\-
+] file .\|.\|.
+.br
+.B gawk
+[ \*(PX or \*(GN style options ]
+[
+.B \-\^\-
+]
+.I program-text
+file .\|.\|.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Gawk
+is the \*(GN Project's implementation of the \*(AK programming language.
+It conforms to the definition of the language in
+the \*(PX 1003.2 Command Language And Utilities Standard.
+This version in turn is based on the description in
+.IR "The AWK Programming Language" ,
+by Aho, Kernighan, and Weinberger,
+with the additional features found in the System V Release 4 version
+of \*(UX
+.IR awk .
+.I Gawk
+also provides more recent Bell Labs
+.I awk
+extensions, and some \*(GN-specific extensions.
+.PP
+The command line consists of options to
+.I gawk
+itself, the \*(AK program text (if not supplied via the
+.B \-f
+or
+.B \-\^\-file
+options), and values to be made
+available in the
+.B ARGC
+and
+.B ARGV
+pre-defined \*(AK variables.
+.SH OPTION FORMAT
+.PP
+.I Gawk
+options may be either the traditional \*(PX one letter options,
+or the \*(GN style long options.  \*(PX options start with a single \*(lq\-\*(rq,
+while long options start with \*(lq\-\^\-\*(rq.
+Long options are provided for both \*(GN-specific features and
+for \*(PX mandated features.
+.PP
+Following the \*(PX standard,
+.IR gawk -specific
+options are supplied via arguments to the
+.B \-W
+option.  Multiple
+.B \-W
+options may be supplied
+Each
+.B \-W
+option has a corresponding long option, as detailed below.
+Arguments to long options are either joined with the option
+by an
+.B =
+sign, with no intervening spaces, or they may be provided in the
+next command line argument.
+Long options may be abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation
+remains unique.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.PP
+.I Gawk
+accepts the following options.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.BI \-F " fs"
+.TP
+.PD
+.BI \-\^\-field-separator " fs"
+Use
+.I fs
+for the input field separator (the value of the
+.B FS
+predefined
+variable).
+.TP
+.PD 0
+\fB\-v\fI var\fB\^=\^\fIval\fR
+.TP
+.PD
+\fB\-\^\-assign \fIvar\fB\^=\^\fIval\fR
+Assign the value
+.IR val ,
+to the variable
+.IR var ,
+before execution of the program begins.
+Such variable values are available to the
+.B BEGIN
+block of an \*(AK program.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.BI \-f " program-file"
+.TP
+.PD
+.BI \-\^\-file " program-file"
+Read the \*(AK program source from the file
+.IR program-file ,
+instead of from the first command line argument.
+Multiple
+.B \-f
+(or
+.BR \-\^\-file )
+options may be used.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.BI \-mf " NNN"
+.TP
+.PD
+.BI \-mr " NNN"
+Set various memory limits to the value
+.IR NNN .
+The
+.B f
+flag sets the maximum number of fields, and the
+.B r
+flag sets the maximum record size.  These two flags and the
+.B \-m
+option are from the Bell Labs research version of \*(UX
+.IR awk .
+They are ignored by
+.IR gawk ,
+since
+.I gawk
+has no pre-defined limits.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W traditional"
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W compat"
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B \-\^\-traditional
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-compat
+Run in
+.I compatibility
+mode.  In compatibility mode,
+.I gawk
+behaves identically to \*(UX
+.IR awk ;
+none of the \*(GN-specific extensions are recognized.
+The use of
+.B \-\^\-traditional
+is preferred over the other forms of this option.
+See
+.BR "GNU EXTENSIONS" ,
+below, for more information.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W copyleft"
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W copyright"
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B \-\^\-copyleft
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-copyright
+Print the short version of the \*(GN copyright information message on
+the standard output, and exits successfully.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W help"
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W usage"
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B \-\^\-help
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-usage
+Print a relatively short summary of the available options on
+the standard output.
+(Per the
+.IR "GNU Coding Standards" ,
+these options cause an immediate, successful exit.)
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W lint"
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-lint
+Provide warnings about constructs that are
+dubious or non-portable to other \*(AK implementations.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W lint\-old"
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-lint\-old
+Provide warnings about constructs that are
+not portable to the original version of Unix
+.IR awk .
+.ig
+.\" This option is left undocumented, on purpose.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W nostalgia"
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-nostalgia
+Provide a moment of nostalgia for long time
+.I awk
+users.
+..
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W posix"
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-posix
+This turns on
+.I compatibility
+mode, with the following additional restrictions:
+.RS
+.TP \w'\(bu'u+1n
+\(bu
+.B \ex
+escape sequences are not recognized.
+.TP
+\(bu
+Only space and tab act as field separators when
+.B FS
+is set to a single space, newline does not.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The synonym
+.B func
+for the keyword
+.B function
+is not recognized.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The operators
+.B **
+and
+.B **=
+cannot be used in place of
+.B ^
+and
+.BR ^= .
+.TP
+\(bu
+The
+.B fflush()
+function is not available.
+.RE
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W re\-interval"
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-re\-interval
+Enable the use of
+.I "interval expressions"
+in regular expression matching
+(see
+.BR "Regular Expressions" ,
+below).
+Interval expressions were not traditionally available in the
+\*(AK language.  The \*(PX standard added them, to make
+.I awk
+and
+.I egrep
+consistent with each other.
+However, their use is likely
+to break old \*(AK programs, so
+.I gawk
+only provides them if they are requested with this option, or when
+.B \-\^\-posix
+is specified.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.BI "\-W source " program-text
+.TP
+.PD
+.BI \-\^\-source " program-text"
+Use
+.I program-text
+as \*(AK program source code.
+This option allows the easy intermixing of library functions (used via the
+.B \-f
+and
+.B \-\^\-file
+options) with source code entered on the command line.
+It is intended primarily for medium to large \*(AK programs used
+in shell scripts.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "\-W version"
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-version
+Print version information for this particular copy of
+.I gawk
+on the standard output.
+This is useful mainly for knowing if the current copy of
+.I gawk
+on your system
+is up to date with respect to whatever the Free Software Foundation
+is distributing.
+This is also useful when reporting bugs.
+(Per the
+.IR "GNU Coding Standards" ,
+these options cause an immediate, successful exit.)
+.TP
+.B \-\^\-
+Signal the end of options.  This is useful to allow further arguments to the
+\*(AK program itself to start with a \*(lq\-\*(rq.
+This is mainly for consistency with the argument parsing convention used
+by most other \*(PX programs.
+.PP
+In compatibility mode,
+any other options are flagged as illegal, but are otherwise ignored.
+In normal operation, as long as program text has been supplied, unknown
+options are passed on to the \*(AK program in the
+.B ARGV
+array for processing.  This is particularly useful for running \*(AK
+programs via the \*(lq#!\*(rq executable interpreter mechanism.
+.SH AWK PROGRAM EXECUTION
+.PP
+An \*(AK program consists of a sequence of pattern-action statements
+and optional function definitions.
+.RS
+.PP
+\fIpattern\fB	{ \fIaction statements\fB }\fR
+.br
+\fBfunction \fIname\fB(\fIparameter list\fB) { \fIstatements\fB }\fR
+.RE
+.PP
+.I Gawk
+first reads the program source from the
+.IR program-file (s)
+if specified,
+from arguments to
+.BR \-\^\-source ,
+or from the first non-option argument on the command line.
+The
+.B \-f
+and
+.B \-\^\-source
+options may be used multiple times on the command line.
+.I Gawk
+will read the program text as if all the
+.IR program-file s
+and command line source texts
+had been concatenated together.  This is useful for building libraries
+of \*(AK functions, without having to include them in each new \*(AK
+program that uses them.  It also provides the ability to mix library
+functions with command line programs.
+.PP
+The environment variable
+.B AWKPATH
+specifies a search path to use when finding source files named with
+the
+.B \-f
+option.  If this variable does not exist, the default path is
+\fB".:/usr/local/share/awk"\fR.
+(The actual directory may vary, depending upon how
+.I gawk
+was built and installed.)
+If a file name given to the
+.B \-f
+option contains a \*(lq/\*(rq character, no path search is performed.
+.PP
+.I Gawk
+executes \*(AK programs in the following order.
+First,
+all variable assignments specified via the
+.B \-v
+option are performed.
+Next,
+.I gawk
+compiles the program into an internal form.
+Then,
+.I gawk
+executes the code in the
+.B BEGIN
+block(s) (if any),
+and then proceeds to read
+each file named in the
+.B ARGV
+array.
+If there are no files named on the command line,
+.I gawk
+reads the standard input.
+.PP
+If a filename on the command line has the form
+.IB var = val
+it is treated as a variable assignment.  The variable
+.I var
+will be assigned the value
+.IR val .
+(This happens after any
+.B BEGIN
+block(s) have been run.)
+Command line variable assignment
+is most useful for dynamically assigning values to the variables
+\*(AK uses to control how input is broken into fields and records.
+It is also useful for controlling state if multiple passes are needed over
+a single data file.
+.PP
+If the value of a particular element of
+.B ARGV
+is empty (\fB""\fR),
+.I gawk
+skips over it.
+.PP
+For each record in the input,
+.I gawk
+tests to see if it matches any
+.I pattern
+in the \*(AK program.
+For each pattern that the record matches, the associated
+.I action
+is executed.
+The patterns are tested in the order they occur in the program.
+.PP
+Finally, after all the input is exhausted,
+.I gawk
+executes the code in the
+.B END
+block(s) (if any).
+.SH VARIABLES, RECORDS AND FIELDS
+\*(AK variables are dynamic; they come into existence when they are
+first used.  Their values are either floating-point numbers or strings,
+or both,
+depending upon how they are used.  \*(AK also has one dimensional
+arrays; arrays with multiple dimensions may be simulated.
+Several pre-defined variables are set as a program
+runs; these will be described as needed and summarized below.
+.SS Records
+Normally, records are separated by newline characters.  You can control how
+records are separated by assigning values to the built-in variable
+.BR RS .
+If
+.B RS
+is any single character, that character separates records.
+Otherwise,
+.B RS
+is a regular expression.  Text in the input that matches this
+regular expression will separate the record.
+However, in compatibility mode,
+only the first character of its string
+value is used for separating records.
+If
+.B RS
+is set to the null string, then records are separated by
+blank lines.
+When
+.B RS
+is set to the null string, the newline character always acts as
+a field separator, in addition to whatever value
+.B FS
+may have.
+.SS Fields
+.PP
+As each input record is read,
+.I gawk
+splits the record into
+.IR fields ,
+using the value of the
+.B FS
+variable as the field separator.
+If
+.B FS
+is a single character, fields are separated by that character.
+If
+.B FS
+is the null string, then each individual character becomes a
+separate field.
+Otherwise,
+.B FS
+is expected to be a full regular expression.
+In the special case that
+.B FS
+is a single space, fields are separated
+by runs of spaces and/or tabs and/or newlines.
+(But see the discussion of
+.BR \-\^\-posix ,
+below).
+Note that the value of
+.B IGNORECASE
+(see below) will also affect how fields are split when
+.B FS
+is a regular expression, and how records are separated when
+.B RS
+is a regular expression.
+.PP
+If the
+.B FIELDWIDTHS
+variable is set to a space separated list of numbers, each field is
+expected to have fixed width, and
+.I gawk
+will split up the record using the specified widths.  The value of
+.B FS
+is ignored.
+Assigning a new value to
+.B FS
+overrides the use of
+.BR FIELDWIDTHS ,
+and restores the default behavior.
+.PP
+Each field in the input record may be referenced by its position,
+.BR $1 ,
+.BR $2 ,
+and so on.
+.B $0
+is the whole record.  The value of a field may be assigned to as well.
+Fields need not be referenced by constants:
+.RS
+.PP
+.ft B
+n = 5
+.br
+print $n
+.ft R
+.RE
+.PP
+prints the fifth field in the input record.
+The variable
+.B NF
+is set to the total number of fields in the input record.
+.PP
+References to non-existent fields (i.e. fields after
+.BR $NF )
+produce the null-string.  However, assigning to a non-existent field
+(e.g.,
+.BR "$(NF+2) = 5" )
+will increase the value of
+.BR NF ,
+create any intervening fields with the null string as their value, and
+cause the value of
+.B $0
+to be recomputed, with the fields being separated by the value of
+.BR OFS .
+References to negative numbered fields cause a fatal error.
+Decrementing
+.B NF
+causes the values of fields past the new value to be lost, and the value of
+.B $0
+to be recomputed, with the fields being separated by the value of
+.BR OFS .
+.SS Built-in Variables
+.PP
+.IR Gawk 's
+built-in variables are:
+.PP
+.TP \w'\fBFIELDWIDTHS\fR'u+1n
+.B ARGC
+The number of command line arguments (does not include options to
+.IR gawk ,
+or the program source).
+.TP
+.B ARGIND
+The index in
+.B ARGV
+of the current file being processed.
+.TP
+.B ARGV
+Array of command line arguments.  The array is indexed from
+0 to
+.B ARGC
+\- 1.
+Dynamically changing the contents of
+.B ARGV
+can control the files used for data.
+.TP
+.B CONVFMT
+The conversion format for numbers, \fB"%.6g"\fR, by default.
+.TP
+.B ENVIRON
+An array containing the values of the current environment.
+The array is indexed by the environment variables, each element being
+the value of that variable (e.g., \fBENVIRON["HOME"]\fP might be
+.BR /home/arnold ).
+Changing this array does not affect the environment seen by programs which
+.I gawk
+spawns via redirection or the
+.B system()
+function.
+(This may change in a future version of
+.IR gawk .)
+.\" but don't hold your breath...
+.TP
+.B ERRNO
+If a system error occurs either doing a redirection for
+.BR getline ,
+during a read for
+.BR getline ,
+or during a
+.BR close() ,
+then
+.B ERRNO
+will contain
+a string describing the error.
+.TP
+.B FIELDWIDTHS
+A white-space separated list of fieldwidths.  When set,
+.I gawk
+parses the input into fields of fixed width, instead of using the
+value of the
+.B FS
+variable as the field separator.
+The fixed field width facility is still experimental; the
+semantics may change as
+.I gawk
+evolves over time.
+.TP
+.B FILENAME
+The name of the current input file.
+If no files are specified on the command line, the value of
+.B FILENAME
+is \*(lq\-\*(rq.
+However,
+.B FILENAME
+is undefined inside the
+.B BEGIN
+block.
+.TP
+.B FNR
+The input record number in the current input file.
+.TP
+.B FS
+The input field separator, a space by default.  See
+.BR Fields ,
+above.
+.TP
+.B IGNORECASE
+Controls the case-sensitivity of all regular expression
+and string operations.  If
+.B IGNORECASE
+has a non-zero value, then string comparisons and
+pattern matching in rules,
+field splitting with
+.BR FS ,
+record separating with
+.BR RS ,
+regular expression
+matching with
+.B ~
+and
+.BR !~ ,
+and the
+.BR gensub() ,
+.BR gsub() ,
+.BR index() ,
+.BR match() ,
+.BR split() ,
+and
+.B sub()
+pre-defined functions will all ignore case when doing regular expression
+operations.  Thus, if
+.B IGNORECASE
+is not equal to zero,
+.B /aB/
+matches all of the strings \fB"ab"\fP, \fB"aB"\fP, \fB"Ab"\fP,
+and \fB"AB"\fP.
+As with all \*(AK variables, the initial value of
+.B IGNORECASE
+is zero, so all regular expression and string
+operations are normally case-sensitive.
+Under Unix, the full ISO 8859-1 Latin-1 character set is used
+when ignoring case.
+.B NOTE:
+In versions of
+.I gawk
+prior to 3.0,
+.B IGNORECASE
+only affected regular expression operations.  It now affects string
+comparisons as well.
+.TP
+.B NF
+The number of fields in the current input record.
+.TP
+.B NR
+The total number of input records seen so far.
+.TP
+.B OFMT
+The output format for numbers, \fB"%.6g"\fR, by default.
+.TP
+.B OFS
+The output field separator, a space by default.
+.TP
+.B ORS
+The output record separator, by default a newline.
+.TP
+.B RS
+The input record separator, by default a newline.
+.TP
+.B RT
+The record terminator.
+.I Gawk
+sets
+.B RT
+to the input text that matched the character or regular expression
+specified by
+.BR RS .
+.TP
+.B RSTART
+The index of the first character matched by
+.BR match() ;
+0 if no match.
+.TP
+.B RLENGTH
+The length of the string matched by
+.BR match() ;
+\-1 if no match.
+.TP
+.B SUBSEP
+The character used to separate multiple subscripts in array
+elements, by default \fB"\e034"\fR.
+.SS Arrays
+.PP
+Arrays are subscripted with an expression between square brackets
+.RB ( [ " and " ] ).
+If the expression is an expression list
+.RI ( expr ", " expr " .\|.\|.)"
+then the array subscript is a string consisting of the
+concatenation of the (string) value of each expression,
+separated by the value of the
+.B SUBSEP
+variable.
+This facility is used to simulate multiply dimensioned
+arrays.  For example:
+.PP
+.RS
+.ft B
+i = "A";\^ j = "B";\^ k = "C"
+.br
+x[i, j, k] = "hello, world\en"
+.ft R
+.RE
+.PP
+assigns the string \fB"hello, world\en"\fR to the element of the array
+.B x
+which is indexed by the string \fB"A\e034B\e034C"\fR.  All arrays in \*(AK
+are associative, i.e. indexed by string values.
+.PP
+The special operator
+.B in
+may be used in an
+.B if
+or
+.B while
+statement to see if an array has an index consisting of a particular
+value.
+.PP
+.RS
+.ft B
+.nf
+if (val in array)
+	print array[val]
+.fi
+.ft
+.RE
+.PP
+If the array has multiple subscripts, use
+.BR "(i, j) in array" .
+.PP
+The
+.B in
+construct may also be used in a
+.B for
+loop to iterate over all the elements of an array.
+.PP
+An element may be deleted from an array using the
+.B delete
+statement.
+The
+.B delete
+statement may also be used to delete the entire contents of an array,
+just by specifying the array name without a subscript.
+.SS Variable Typing And Conversion
+.PP
+Variables and fields
+may be (floating point) numbers, or strings, or both.  How the
+value of a variable is interpreted depends upon its context.  If used in
+a numeric expression, it will be treated as a number, if used as a string
+it will be treated as a string.
+.PP
+To force a variable to be treated as a number, add 0 to it; to force it
+to be treated as a string, concatenate it with the null string.
+.PP
+When a string must be converted to a number, the conversion is accomplished
+using
+.IR atof (3).
+A number is converted to a string by using the value of
+.B CONVFMT
+as a format string for
+.IR sprintf (3),
+with the numeric value of the variable as the argument.
+However, even though all numbers in \*(AK are floating-point,
+integral values are
+.I always
+converted as integers.  Thus, given
+.PP
+.RS
+.ft B
+.nf
+CONVFMT = "%2.2f"
+a = 12
+b = a ""
+.fi
+.ft R
+.RE
+.PP
+the variable
+.B b
+has a string value of \fB"12"\fR and not \fB"12.00"\fR.
+.PP
+.I Gawk
+performs comparisons as follows:
+If two variables are numeric, they are compared numerically.
+If one value is numeric and the other has a string value that is a
+\*(lqnumeric string,\*(rq then comparisons are also done numerically.
+Otherwise, the numeric value is converted to a string and a string
+comparison is performed.
+Two strings are compared, of course, as strings.
+According to the \*(PX standard, even if two strings are
+numeric strings, a numeric comparison is performed.  However, this is
+clearly incorrect, and
+.I gawk
+does not do this.
+.PP
+Note that string constants, such as \fB"57"\fP, are
+.I not
+numeric strings, they are string constants.
+The idea of \*(lqnumeric string\*(rq
+only applies to fields,
+.B getline
+input,
+.BR FILENAME ,
+.B ARGV
+elements,
+.B ENVIRON
+elements and the elements of an array created by
+.B split()
+that are numeric strings.
+The basic idea is that
+.IR "user input" ,
+and only user input, that looks numeric,
+should be treated that way.
+.PP
+Uninitialized variables have the numeric value 0 and the string value ""
+(the null, or empty, string).
+.SH PATTERNS AND ACTIONS
+\*(AK is a line-oriented language.  The pattern comes first, and then the
+action.  Action statements are enclosed in
+.B {
+and
+.BR } .
+Either the pattern may be missing, or the action may be missing, but,
+of course, not both.  If the pattern is missing, the action will be
+executed for every single record of input.
+A missing action is equivalent to
+.RS
+.PP
+.B "{ print }"
+.RE
+.PP
+which prints the entire record.
+.PP
+Comments begin with the \*(lq#\*(rq character, and continue until the
+end of the line.
+Blank lines may be used to separate statements.
+Normally, a statement ends with a newline, however, this is not the
+case for lines ending in
+a \*(lq,\*(rq,
+.BR { ,
+.BR ? ,
+.BR : ,
+.BR && ,
+or
+.BR || .
+Lines ending in
+.B do
+or
+.B else
+also have their statements automatically continued on the following line.
+In other cases, a line can be continued by ending it with a \*(lq\e\*(rq,
+in which case the newline will be ignored.
+.PP
+Multiple statements may
+be put on one line by separating them with a \*(lq;\*(rq.
+This applies to both the statements within the action part of a
+pattern-action pair (the usual case),
+and to the pattern-action statements themselves.
+.SS Patterns
+\*(AK patterns may be one of the following:
+.PP
+.RS
+.nf
+.B BEGIN
+.B END
+.BI / "regular expression" /
+.I "relational expression"
+.IB pattern " && " pattern
+.IB pattern " || " pattern
+.IB pattern " ? " pattern " : " pattern
+.BI ( pattern )
+.BI ! " pattern"
+.IB pattern1 ", " pattern2
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+.B BEGIN
+and
+.B END
+are two special kinds of patterns which are not tested against
+the input.
+The action parts of all
+.B BEGIN
+patterns are merged as if all the statements had
+been written in a single
+.B BEGIN
+block.  They are executed before any
+of the input is read.  Similarly, all the
+.B END
+blocks are merged,
+and executed when all the input is exhausted (or when an
+.B exit
+statement is executed).
+.B BEGIN
+and
+.B END
+patterns cannot be combined with other patterns in pattern expressions.
+.B BEGIN
+and
+.B END
+patterns cannot have missing action parts.
+.PP
+For
+.BI / "regular expression" /
+patterns, the associated statement is executed for each input record that matches
+the regular expression.
+Regular expressions are the same as those in
+.IR egrep (1),
+and are summarized below.
+.PP
+A
+.I "relational expression"
+may use any of the operators defined below in the section on actions.
+These generally test whether certain fields match certain regular expressions.
+.PP
+The
+.BR && ,
+.BR || ,
+and
+.B !
+operators are logical AND, logical OR, and logical NOT, respectively, as in C.
+They do short-circuit evaluation, also as in C, and are used for combining
+more primitive pattern expressions.  As in most languages, parentheses
+may be used to change the order of evaluation.
+.PP
+The
+.B ?\^:
+operator is like the same operator in C.  If the first pattern is true
+then the pattern used for testing is the second pattern, otherwise it is
+the third.  Only one of the second and third patterns is evaluated.
+.PP
+The
+.IB pattern1 ", " pattern2
+form of an expression is called a
+.IR "range pattern" .
+It matches all input records starting with a record that matches
+.IR pattern1 ,
+and continuing until a record that matches
+.IR pattern2 ,
+inclusive.  It does not combine with any other sort of pattern expression.
+.SS Regular Expressions
+Regular expressions are the extended kind found in
+.IR egrep .
+They are composed of characters as follows:
+.TP \w'\fB[^\fIabc.\|.\|.\fB]\fR'u+2n
+.I c
+matches the non-metacharacter
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I \ec
+matches the literal character
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.B .
+matches any character
+.I including
+newline.
+.TP
+.B ^
+matches the beginning of a string.
+.TP
+.B $
+matches the end of a string.
+.TP
+.BI [ abc.\|.\|. ]
+character list, matches any of the characters
+.IR abc.\|.\|. .
+.TP
+.BI [^ abc.\|.\|. ]
+negated character list, matches any character except
+.IR abc.\|.\|. .
+.TP
+.IB r1 | r2
+alternation: matches either
+.I r1
+or
+.IR r2 .
+.TP
+.I r1r2
+concatenation: matches
+.IR r1 ,
+and then
+.IR r2 .
+.TP
+.IB r +
+matches one or more
+.IR r 's.
+.TP
+.IB r *
+matches zero or more
+.IR r 's.
+.TP
+.IB r ?
+matches zero or one
+.IR r 's.
+.TP
+.BI ( r )
+grouping: matches
+.IR r .
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.IB r { n }
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.IB r { n ,}
+.TP
+.PD
+.IB r { n , m }
+One or two numbers inside braces denote an
+.IR "interval expression" .
+If there is one number in the braces, the preceding regexp
+.I r
+is repeated
+.I n
+times.  If there are two numbers separated by a comma,
+.I r
+is repeated
+.I n
+to
+.I m
+times.
+If there is one number followed by a comma, then
+.I r
+is repeated at least
+.I n
+times.
+.sp .5
+Interval expressions are only available if either
+.B \-\^\-posix
+or
+.B \-\^\-re\-interval
+is specified on the command line.
+.TP
+.B \ey
+matches the empty string at either the beginning or the
+end of a word.
+.TP
+.B \eB
+matches the empty string within a word.
+.TP
+.B \e<
+matches the empty string at the beginning of a word.
+.TP
+.B \e>
+matches the empty string at the end of a word.
+.TP
+.B \ew
+matches any word-constituent character (letter, digit, or underscore).
+.TP
+.B \eW
+matches any character that is not word-constituent.
+.TP
+.B \e`
+matches the empty string at the beginning of a buffer (string).
+.TP
+.B \e'
+matches the empty string at the end of a buffer.
+.PP
+The escape sequences that are valid in string constants (see below)
+are also legal in regular expressions.
+.PP
+.I "Character classes"
+are a new feature introduced in the \*(PX standard.
+A character class is a special notation for describing
+lists of characters that have a specific attribute, but where the
+actual characters themselves can vary from country to country and/or
+from character set to character set.  For example, the notion of what
+is an alphabetic character differs in the USA and in France.
+.PP
+A character class is only valid in a regexp
+.I inside
+the brackets of a character list.  Character classes consist of
+.BR [: ,
+a keyword denoting the class, and
+.BR :] .
+Here are the character
+classes defined by the \*(PX standard.
+.TP
+.B [:alnum:]
+Alphanumeric characters.
+.TP
+.B [:alpha:]
+Alphabetic characters.
+.TP
+.B [:blank:]
+Space or tab characters.
+.TP
+.B [:cntrl:]
+Control characters.
+.TP
+.B [:digit:]
+Numeric characters.
+.TP
+.B [:graph:]
+Characters that are both printable and visible.
+(A space is printable, but not visible, while an
+.B a
+is both.)
+.TP
+.B [:lower:]
+Lower-case alphabetic characters.
+.TP
+.B [:print:]
+Printable characters (characters that are not control characters.)
+.TP
+.B [:punct:]
+Punctuation characters (characters that are not letter, digits,
+control characters, or space characters).
+.TP
+.B [:space:]
+Space characters (such as space, tab, and formfeed, to name a few).
+.TP
+.B [:upper:]
+Upper-case alphabetic characters.
+.TP
+.B [:xdigit:]
+Characters that are hexadecimal digits.
+.PP
+For example, before the \*(PX standard, to match alphanumeric
+characters, you would have had to write
+.BR /[A\-Za\-z0\-9]/ .
+If your character set had other alphabetic characters in it, this would not
+match them.  With the \*(PX character classes, you can write
+.BR /[[:alnum:]]/ ,
+and this will match
+.I all
+the alphabetic and numeric characters in your character set.
+.PP
+Two additional special sequences can appear in character lists.
+These apply to non-ASCII character sets, which can have single symbols
+(called
+.IR "collating elements" )
+that are represented with more than one
+character, as well as several characters that are equivalent for
+.IR collating ,
+or sorting, purposes.  (E.g., in French, a plain \*(lqe\*(rq
+and a grave-accented e\` are equivalent.)
+.TP
+Collating Symbols
+A collating symbols is a multi-character collating element enclosed in
+.B [.
+and
+.BR .] .
+For example, if
+.B ch
+is a collating element, then
+.B [[.ch.]]
+is a regexp that matches this collating element, while
+.B [ch]
+is a regexp that matches either
+.B c
+or
+.BR h .
+.TP
+Equivalence Classes
+An equivalence class is a locale-specific name for a list of
+characters that are equivalent.  The name is enclosed in
+.B [=
+and
+.BR =] .
+For example, the name
+.B e
+might be used to represent all of
+\*(lqe,\*(rq \*(lqe\`,\*(rq and \*(lqe\`.\*(rq
+In this case,
+.B [[=e]]
+is a regexp
+that matches any of
+ .BR e ,
+ .BR e\' ,
+or
+ .BR e\` .
+.PP
+These features are very valuable in non-English speaking locales.
+The library functions that
+.I gawk
+uses for regular expression matching
+currently only recognize \*(PX character classes; they do not recognize
+collating symbols or equivalence classes.
+.PP
+The
+.BR \ey ,
+.BR \eB ,
+.BR \e< ,
+.BR \e> ,
+.BR \ew ,
+.BR \eW ,
+.BR \e` ,
+and
+.B \e'
+operators are specific to
+.IR gawk ;
+they are extensions based on facilities in the \*(GN regexp libraries.
+.PP
+The various command line options
+control how
+.I gawk
+interprets characters in regexps.
+.TP
+No options
+In the default case,
+.I gawk
+provide all the facilities of
+\*(PX regexps and the \*(GN regexp operators described above.
+However, interval expressions are not supported.
+.TP
+.B \-\^\-posix
+Only \*(PX regexps are supported, the \*(GN operators are not special.
+(E.g.,
+.B \ew
+matches a literal
+.BR w ).
+Interval expressions are allowed.
+.TP
+.B \-\^\-traditional
+Traditional Unix
+.I awk
+regexps are matched.  The \*(GN operators
+are not special, interval expressions are not available, and neither
+are the \*(PX character classes
+.RB ( [[:alnum:]]
+and so on).
+Characters described by octal and hexadecimal escape sequences are
+treated literally, even if they represent regexp metacharacters.
+.TP
+.B \-\^\-re\-interval
+Allow interval expressions in regexps, even if
+.B \-\^\-traditional
+has been provided.
+.SS Actions
+Action statements are enclosed in braces,
+.B {
+and
+.BR } .
+Action statements consist of the usual assignment, conditional, and looping
+statements found in most languages.  The operators, control statements,
+and input/output statements
+available are patterned after those in C.
+.SS Operators
+.PP
+The operators in \*(AK, in order of decreasing precedence, are
+.PP
+.TP "\w'\fB*= /= %= ^=\fR'u+1n"
+.BR ( \&.\|.\|. )
+Grouping
+.TP
+.B $
+Field reference.
+.TP
+.B "++ \-\^\-"
+Increment and decrement, both prefix and postfix.
+.TP
+.B ^
+Exponentiation (\fB**\fR may also be used, and \fB**=\fR for
+the assignment operator).
+.TP
+.B "+ \- !"
+Unary plus, unary minus, and logical negation.
+.TP
+.B "* / %"
+Multiplication, division, and modulus.
+.TP
+.B "+ \-"
+Addition and subtraction.
+.TP
+.I space
+String concatenation.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "< >"
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "<= >="
+.TP
+.PD
+.B "!= =="
+The regular relational operators.
+.TP
+.B "~ !~"
+Regular expression match, negated match.
+.B NOTE:
+Do not use a constant regular expression
+.RB ( /foo/ )
+on the left-hand side of a
+.B ~
+or
+.BR !~ .
+Only use one on the right-hand side.  The expression
+.BI "/foo/ ~ " exp
+has the same meaning as \fB(($0 ~ /foo/) ~ \fIexp\fB)\fR.
+This is usually
+.I not
+what was intended.
+.TP
+.B in
+Array membership.
+.TP
+.B &&
+Logical AND.
+.TP
+.B ||
+Logical OR.
+.TP
+.B ?:
+The C conditional expression.  This has the form
+.IB expr1 " ? " expr2 " : " expr3\c
+\&.
+If
+.I expr1
+is true, the value of the expression is
+.IR expr2 ,
+otherwise it is
+.IR expr3 .
+Only one of
+.I expr2
+and
+.I expr3
+is evaluated.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B "= += \-="
+.TP
+.PD
+.B "*= /= %= ^="
+Assignment.  Both absolute assignment
+.BI ( var " = " value )
+and operator-assignment (the other forms) are supported.
+.SS Control Statements
+.PP
+The control statements are
+as follows:
+.PP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fBif (\fIcondition\fB) \fIstatement\fR [ \fBelse\fI statement \fR]
+\fBwhile (\fIcondition\fB) \fIstatement \fR
+\fBdo \fIstatement \fBwhile (\fIcondition\fB)\fR
+\fBfor (\fIexpr1\fB; \fIexpr2\fB; \fIexpr3\fB) \fIstatement\fR
+\fBfor (\fIvar \fBin\fI array\fB) \fIstatement\fR
+\fBbreak\fR
+\fBcontinue\fR
+\fBdelete \fIarray\^\fB[\^\fIindex\^\fB]\fR
+\fBdelete \fIarray\^\fR
+\fBexit\fR [ \fIexpression\fR ]
+\fB{ \fIstatements \fB}
+.fi
+.RE
+.SS "I/O Statements"
+.PP
+The input/output statements are as follows:
+.PP
+.TP "\w'\fBprintf \fIfmt, expr-list\fR'u+1n"
+.BI close( file )
+Close file (or pipe, see below).
+.TP
+.B getline
+Set
+.B $0
+from next input record; set
+.BR NF ,
+.BR NR ,
+.BR FNR .
+.TP
+.BI "getline <" file
+Set
+.B $0
+from next record of
+.IR file ;
+set
+.BR NF .
+.TP
+.BI getline " var"
+Set
+.I var
+from next input record; set
+.BR NR ,
+.BR FNR .
+.TP
+.BI getline " var" " <" file
+Set
+.I var
+from next record of
+.IR file .
+.TP
+.B next
+Stop processing the current input record.  The next input record
+is read and processing starts over with the first pattern in the
+\*(AK program.  If the end of the input data is reached, the
+.B END
+block(s), if any, are executed.
+.TP
+.B "nextfile"
+Stop processing the current input file.  The next input record read
+comes from the next input file.
+.B FILENAME
+and
+.B ARGIND
+are updated,
+.B FNR
+is reset to 1, and processing starts over with the first pattern in the
+\*(AK program.  If the end of the input data is reached, the
+.B END
+block(s), if any, are executed.
+.B NOTE:
+Earlier versions of gawk used
+.BR "next file" ,
+as two words.  While this usage is still recognized, it generates a
+warning message and will eventually be removed.
+.TP
+.B print
+Prints the current record.
+The output record is terminated with the value of the
+.B ORS
+variable.
+.TP
+.BI print " expr-list"
+Prints expressions.
+Each expression is separated by the value of the
+.B OFS
+variable.
+The output record is terminated with the value of the
+.B ORS
+variable.
+.TP
+.BI print " expr-list" " >" file
+Prints expressions on
+.IR file .
+Each expression is separated by the value of the
+.B OFS
+variable.  The output record is terminated with the value of the
+.B ORS
+variable.
+.TP
+.BI printf " fmt, expr-list"
+Format and print.
+.TP
+.BI printf " fmt, expr-list" " >" file
+Format and print on
+.IR file .
+.TP
+.BI system( cmd-line )
+Execute the command
+.IR cmd-line ,
+and return the exit status.
+(This may not be available on non-\*(PX systems.)
+.TP
+\&\fBfflush(\fR[\fIfile\^\fR]\fB)\fR
+Flush any buffers associated with the open output file or pipe
+.IR file .
+If
+.I file
+is missing, then standard output is flushed.
+If
+.I file
+is the null string,
+then all open output files and pipes
+have their buffers flushed.
+.PP
+Other input/output redirections are also allowed.  For
+.B print
+and
+.BR printf ,
+.BI >> " file"
+appends output to the
+.IR file ,
+while
+.BI | " command"
+writes on a pipe.
+In a similar fashion,
+.IB command " | getline"
+pipes into
+.BR getline .
+The
+.BR getline
+command will return 0 on end of file, and \-1 on an error.
+.PP
+NOTE: If using a pipe to
+.BR getline ,
+or from
+.B print
+or
+.BR printf
+within a loop, you
+.I must
+use
+.B close()
+to create new instances of the command.
+AWK does not automatically close pipes when
+they return EOF.
+.SS The \fIprintf\fP\^ Statement
+.PP
+The \*(AK versions of the
+.B printf
+statement and
+.B sprintf()
+function
+(see below)
+accept the following conversion specification formats:
+.TP
+.B %c
+An \s-1ASCII\s+1 character.
+If the argument used for
+.B %c
+is numeric, it is treated as a character and printed.
+Otherwise, the argument is assumed to be a string, and the only first
+character of that string is printed.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B %d
+.TP
+.PD
+.B %i
+A decimal number (the integer part).
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B %e
+.TP
+.PD
+.B %E
+A floating point number of the form
+.BR [\-]d.dddddde[+\^\-]dd .
+The
+.B %E
+format uses
+.B E
+instead of
+.BR e .
+.TP
+.B %f
+A floating point number of the form
+.BR [\-]ddd.dddddd .
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B %g
+.TP
+.PD
+.B %G
+Use
+.B %e
+or
+.B %f
+conversion, whichever is shorter, with nonsignificant zeros suppressed.
+The
+.B %G
+format uses
+.B %E
+instead of
+.BR %e .
+.TP
+.B %o
+An unsigned octal number (also an integer).
+.TP
+.PD
+.B %u
+An unsigned decimal number (again, an integer).
+.TP
+.B %s
+A character string.
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B %x
+.TP
+.PD
+.B %X
+An unsigned hexadecimal number (an integer).
+The
+.B %X
+format uses
+.B ABCDEF
+instead of
+.BR abcdef .
+.TP
+.B %%
+A single
+.B %
+character; no argument is converted.
+.PP
+There are optional, additional parameters that may lie between the
+.B %
+and the control letter:
+.TP
+.B \-
+The expression should be left-justified within its field.
+.TP
+.I space
+For numeric conversions, prefix positive values with a space, and
+negative values with a minus sign.
+.TP
+.B +
+The plus sign, used before the width modifier (see below),
+says to always supply a sign for numeric conversions, even if the data
+to be formatted is positive.  The
+.B +
+overrides the space modifier.
+.TP
+.B #
+Use an \*(lqalternate form\*(rq for certain control letters.
+For
+.BR %o ,
+supply a leading zero.
+For
+.BR %x ,
+and
+.BR %X ,
+supply a leading
+.BR 0x
+or
+.BR 0X
+for
+a nonzero result.
+For
+.BR %e ,
+.BR %E ,
+and
+.BR %f ,
+the result will always contain a
+decimal point.
+For
+.BR %g ,
+and
+.BR %G ,
+trailing zeros are not removed from the result.
+.TP
+.B 0
+A leading
+.B 0
+(zero) acts as a flag, that indicates output should be
+padded with zeroes instead of spaces.
+This applies even to non-numeric output formats.
+This flag only has an effect when the field width is wider than the
+value to be printed.
+.TP
+.I width
+The field should be padded to this width.  The field is normally padded
+with spaces.  If the
+.B 0
+flag has been used, it is padded with zeroes.
+.TP
+.BI \&. prec
+A number that specifies the precision to use when printing.
+For the
+.BR %e ,
+.BR %E ,
+and
+.BR %f
+formats, this specifies the
+number of digits you want printed to the right of the decimal point.
+For the
+.BR %g ,
+and
+.B %G
+formats, it specifies the maximum number
+of significant digits.  For the
+.BR %d ,
+.BR %o ,
+.BR %i ,
+.BR %u ,
+.BR %x ,
+and
+.B %X
+formats, it specifies the minimum number of
+digits to print.  For a string, it specifies the maximum number of
+characters from the string that should be printed.
+.PP
+The dynamic
+.I width
+and
+.I prec
+capabilities of the \*(AN C
+.B printf()
+routines are supported.
+A
+.B *
+in place of either the
+.B width
+or
+.B prec
+specifications will cause their values to be taken from
+the argument list to
+.B printf
+or
+.BR sprintf() .
+.SS Special File Names
+.PP
+When doing I/O redirection from either
+.B print
+or
+.B printf
+into a file,
+or via
+.B getline
+from a file,
+.I gawk
+recognizes certain special filenames internally.  These filenames
+allow access to open file descriptors inherited from
+.IR gawk 's
+parent process (usually the shell).
+Other special filenames provide access to information about the running
+.B gawk
+process.
+The filenames are:
+.TP \w'\fB/dev/stdout\fR'u+1n
+.B /dev/pid
+Reading this file returns the process ID of the current process,
+in decimal, terminated with a newline.
+.TP
+.B /dev/ppid
+Reading this file returns the parent process ID of the current process,
+in decimal, terminated with a newline.
+.TP
+.B /dev/pgrpid
+Reading this file returns the process group ID of the current process,
+in decimal, terminated with a newline.
+.TP
+.B /dev/user
+Reading this file returns a single record terminated with a newline.
+The fields are separated with spaces.
+.B $1
+is the value of the
+.IR getuid (2)
+system call,
+.B $2
+is the value of the
+.IR geteuid (2)
+system call,
+.B $3
+is the value of the
+.IR getgid (2)
+system call, and
+.B $4
+is the value of the
+.IR getegid (2)
+system call.
+If there are any additional fields, they are the group IDs returned by
+.IR getgroups (2).
+Multiple groups may not be supported on all systems.
+.TP
+.B /dev/stdin
+The standard input.
+.TP
+.B /dev/stdout
+The standard output.
+.TP
+.B /dev/stderr
+The standard error output.
+.TP
+.BI /dev/fd/\^ n
+The file associated with the open file descriptor
+.IR n .
+.PP
+These are particularly useful for error messages.  For example:
+.PP
+.RS
+.ft B
+print "You blew it!" > "/dev/stderr"
+.ft R
+.RE
+.PP
+whereas you would otherwise have to use
+.PP
+.RS
+.ft B
+print "You blew it!" | "cat 1>&2"
+.ft R
+.RE
+.PP
+These file names may also be used on the command line to name data files.
+.SS Numeric Functions
+.PP
+\*(AK has the following pre-defined arithmetic functions:
+.PP
+.TP \w'\fBsrand(\fR[\fIexpr\^\fR]\fB)\fR'u+1n
+.BI atan2( y , " x" )
+returns the arctangent of
+.I y/x
+in radians.
+.TP
+.BI cos( expr )
+returns the cosine of
+.IR expr ,
+which is in radians.
+.TP
+.BI exp( expr )
+the exponential function.
+.TP
+.BI int( expr )
+truncates to integer.
+.TP
+.BI log( expr )
+the natural logarithm function.
+.TP
+.B rand()
+returns a random number between 0 and 1.
+.TP
+.BI sin( expr )
+returns the sine of
+.IR expr ,
+which is in radians.
+.TP
+.BI sqrt( expr )
+the square root function.
+.TP
+\&\fBsrand(\fR[\fIexpr\^\fR]\fB)\fR
+uses
+.I expr
+as a new seed for the random number generator.  If no
+.I expr
+is provided, the time of day will be used.
+The return value is the previous seed for the random
+number generator.
+.SS String Functions
+.PP
+.I Gawk
+has the following pre-defined string functions:
+.PP
+.TP "\w'\fBsprintf(\^\fIfmt\fB\^, \fIexpr-list\^\fB)\fR'u+1n"
+\fBgensub(\fIr\fB, \fIs\fB, \fIh \fR[\fB, \fIt\fR]\fB)\fR
+search the target string
+.I t
+for matches of the regular expression
+.IR r .
+If
+.I h
+is a string beginning with
+.B g
+or
+.BR G ,
+then replace all matches of
+.I r
+with
+.IR s .
+Otherwise,
+.I h
+is a number indicating which match of
+.I r
+to replace.
+If no
+.I t
+is supplied,
+.B $0
+is used instead.
+Within the replacement text
+.IR s ,
+the sequence
+.BI \e n\fR,
+where
+.I n
+is a digit from 1 to 9, may be used to indicate just the text that
+matched the
+.IR n 'th
+parenthesized subexpression.  The sequence
+.B \e0
+represents the entire matched text, as does the character
+.BR & .
+Unlike
+.B sub()
+and
+.BR gsub() ,
+the modified string is returned as the result of the function,
+and the original target string is
+.I not
+changed.
+.TP "\w'\fBsprintf(\^\fIfmt\fB\^, \fIexpr-list\^\fB)\fR'u+1n"
+\fBgsub(\fIr\fB, \fIs \fR[\fB, \fIt\fR]\fB)\fR
+for each substring matching the regular expression
+.I r
+in the string
+.IR t ,
+substitute the string
+.IR s ,
+and return the number of substitutions.
+If
+.I t
+is not supplied, use
+.BR $0 .
+An
+.B &
+in the replacement text is replaced with the text that was actually matched.
+Use
+.B \e&
+to get a literal
+.BR & .
+See
+.I "Effective AWK Programming"
+for a fuller discussion of the rules for
+.BR &'s
+and backslashes in the replacement text of
+.BR sub() ,
+.BR gsub() ,
+and
+.BR gensub() .
+.TP
+.BI index( s , " t" )
+returns the index of the string
+.I t
+in the string
+.IR s ,
+or 0 if
+.I t
+is not present.
+.TP
+\fBlength(\fR[\fIs\fR]\fB)
+returns the length of the string
+.IR s ,
+or the length of
+.B $0
+if
+.I s
+is not supplied.
+.TP
+.BI match( s , " r" )
+returns the position in
+.I s
+where the regular expression
+.I r
+occurs, or 0 if
+.I r
+is not present, and sets the values of
+.B RSTART
+and
+.BR RLENGTH .
+.TP
+\fBsplit(\fIs\fB, \fIa \fR[\fB, \fIr\fR]\fB)\fR
+splits the string
+.I s
+into the array
+.I a
+on the regular expression
+.IR r ,
+and returns the number of fields.  If
+.I r
+is omitted,
+.B FS
+is used instead.
+The array
+.I a
+is cleared first.
+Splitting behaves identically to field splitting, described above.
+.TP
+.BI sprintf( fmt , " expr-list" )
+prints
+.I expr-list
+according to
+.IR fmt ,
+and returns the resulting string.
+.TP
+\fBsub(\fIr\fB, \fIs \fR[\fB, \fIt\fR]\fB)\fR
+just like
+.BR gsub() ,
+but only the first matching substring is replaced.
+.TP
+\fBsubstr(\fIs\fB, \fIi \fR[\fB, \fIn\fR]\fB)\fR
+returns the at most
+.IR n -character
+substring of
+.I s
+starting at
+.IR i .
+If
+.I n
+is omitted, the rest of
+.I s
+is used.
+.TP
+.BI tolower( str )
+returns a copy of the string
+.IR str ,
+with all the upper-case characters in
+.I str
+translated to their corresponding lower-case counterparts.
+Non-alphabetic characters are left unchanged.
+.TP
+.BI toupper( str )
+returns a copy of the string
+.IR str ,
+with all the lower-case characters in
+.I str
+translated to their corresponding upper-case counterparts.
+Non-alphabetic characters are left unchanged.
+.SS Time Functions
+.PP
+Since one of the primary uses of \*(AK programs is processing log files
+that contain time stamp information,
+.I gawk
+provides the following two functions for obtaining time stamps and
+formatting them.
+.PP
+.TP "\w'\fBsystime()\fR'u+1n"
+.B systime()
+returns the current time of day as the number of seconds since the Epoch
+(Midnight UTC, January 1, 1970 on \*(PX systems).
+.TP
+\fBstrftime(\fR[\fIformat \fR[\fB, \fItimestamp\fR]]\fB)\fR
+formats
+.I timestamp
+according to the specification in
+.IR format.
+The
+.I timestamp
+should be of the same form as returned by
+.BR systime() .
+If
+.I timestamp
+is missing, the current time of day is used.
+If
+.I format
+is missing, a default format equivalent to the output of
+.IR date (1)
+will be used.
+See the specification for the
+.B strftime()
+function in \*(AN C for the format conversions that are
+guaranteed to be available.
+A public-domain version of
+.IR strftime (3)
+and a man page for it come with
+.IR gawk ;
+if that version was used to build
+.IR gawk ,
+then all of the conversions described in that man page are available to
+.IR gawk.
+.SS String Constants
+.PP
+String constants in \*(AK are sequences of characters enclosed
+between double quotes (\fB"\fR).  Within strings, certain
+.I "escape sequences"
+are recognized, as in C.  These are:
+.PP
+.TP \w'\fB\e\^\fIddd\fR'u+1n
+.B \e\e
+A literal backslash.
+.TP
+.B \ea
+The \*(lqalert\*(rq character; usually the \s-1ASCII\s+1 \s-1BEL\s+1 character.
+.TP
+.B \eb
+backspace.
+.TP
+.B \ef
+form-feed.
+.TP
+.B \en
+newline.
+.TP
+.B \er
+carriage return.
+.TP
+.B \et
+horizontal tab.
+.TP
+.B \ev
+vertical tab.
+.TP
+.BI \ex "\^hex digits"
+The character represented by the string of hexadecimal digits following
+the
+.BR \ex .
+As in \*(AN C, all following hexadecimal digits are considered part of
+the escape sequence.
+(This feature should tell us something about language design by committee.)
+E.g., \fB"\ex1B"\fR is the \s-1ASCII\s+1 \s-1ESC\s+1 (escape) character.
+.TP
+.BI \e ddd
+The character represented by the 1-, 2-, or 3-digit sequence of octal
+digits.
+E.g., \fB"\e033"\fR is the \s-1ASCII\s+1 \s-1ESC\s+1 (escape) character.
+.TP
+.BI \e c
+The literal character
+.IR c\^ .
+.PP
+The escape sequences may also be used inside constant regular expressions
+(e.g.,
+.B "/[\ \et\ef\en\er\ev]/"
+matches whitespace characters).
+.PP
+In compatibility mode, the characters represented by octal and
+hexadecimal escape sequences are treated literally when used in
+regexp constants.  Thus,
+.B /a\e52b/
+is equivalent to
+.BR /a\e*b/ .
+.SH FUNCTIONS
+Functions in \*(AK are defined as follows:
+.PP
+.RS
+\fBfunction \fIname\fB(\fIparameter list\fB) { \fIstatements \fB}\fR
+.RE
+.PP
+Functions are executed when they are called from within expressions
+in either patterns or actions.  Actual parameters supplied in the function
+call are used to instantiate the formal parameters declared in the function.
+Arrays are passed by reference, other variables are passed by value.
+.PP
+Since functions were not originally part of the \*(AK language, the provision
+for local variables is rather clumsy: They are declared as extra parameters
+in the parameter list.  The convention is to separate local variables from
+real parameters by extra spaces in the parameter list.  For example:
+.PP
+.RS
+.ft B
+.nf
+function  f(p, q,     a, b)	# a & b are local
+{
+	\&.\|.\|.
+}
+
+/abc/	{ .\|.\|. ; f(1, 2) ; .\|.\|. }
+.fi
+.ft R
+.RE
+.PP
+The left parenthesis in a function call is required
+to immediately follow the function name,
+without any intervening white space.
+This is to avoid a syntactic ambiguity with the concatenation operator.
+This restriction does not apply to the built-in functions listed above.
+.PP
+Functions may call each other and may be recursive.
+Function parameters used as local variables are initialized
+to the null string and the number zero upon function invocation.
+.PP
+Use
+.BI return " expr"
+to return a value from a function.  The return value is undefined if no
+value is provided, or if the function returns by \*(lqfalling off\*(rq the
+end.
+.PP
+If
+.B \-\^\-lint
+has been provided,
+.I gawk
+will warn about calls to undefined functions at parse time,
+instead of at run time.
+Calling an undefined function at run time is a fatal error.
+.PP
+The word
+.B func
+may be used in place of
+.BR function .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.nf
+Print and sort the login names of all users:
+
+.ft B
+	BEGIN	{ FS = ":" }
+		{ print $1 | "sort" }
+
+.ft R
+Count lines in a file:
+
+.ft B
+		{ nlines++ }
+	END	{ print nlines }
+
+.ft R
+Precede each line by its number in the file:
+
+.ft B
+	{ print FNR, $0 }
+
+.ft R
+Concatenate and line number (a variation on a theme):
+
+.ft B
+	{ print NR, $0 }
+.ft R
+.fi
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR egrep (1),
+.IR getpid (2),
+.IR getppid (2),
+.IR getpgrp (2),
+.IR getuid (2),
+.IR geteuid (2),
+.IR getgid (2),
+.IR getegid (2),
+.IR getgroups (2)
+.PP
+.IR "The AWK Programming Language" ,
+Alfred V. Aho, Brian W. Kernighan, Peter J. Weinberger,
+Addison-Wesley, 1988.  ISBN 0-201-07981-X.
+.PP
+.IR "Effective AWK Programming" ,
+Edition 1.0, published by the Free Software Foundation, 1995.
+.SH POSIX COMPATIBILITY
+A primary goal for
+.I gawk
+is compatibility with the \*(PX standard, as well as with the
+latest version of \*(UX
+.IR awk .
+To this end,
+.I gawk
+incorporates the following user visible
+features which are not described in the \*(AK book,
+but are part of the Bell Labs version of
+.IR awk ,
+and are in the \*(PX standard.
+.PP
+The
+.B \-v
+option for assigning variables before program execution starts is new.
+The book indicates that command line variable assignment happens when
+.I awk
+would otherwise open the argument as a file, which is after the
+.B BEGIN
+block is executed.  However, in earlier implementations, when such an
+assignment appeared before any file names, the assignment would happen
+.I before
+the
+.B BEGIN
+block was run.  Applications came to depend on this \*(lqfeature.\*(rq
+When
+.I awk
+was changed to match its documentation, this option was added to
+accommodate applications that depended upon the old behavior.
+(This feature was agreed upon by both the AT&T and \*(GN developers.)
+.PP
+The
+.B \-W
+option for implementation specific features is from the \*(PX standard.
+.PP
+When processing arguments,
+.I gawk
+uses the special option \*(lq\-\^\-\*(rq to signal the end of
+arguments.
+In compatibility mode, it will warn about, but otherwise ignore,
+undefined options.
+In normal operation, such arguments are passed on to the \*(AK program for
+it to process.
+.PP
+The \*(AK book does not define the return value of
+.BR srand() .
+The \*(PX standard
+has it return the seed it was using, to allow keeping track
+of random number sequences.  Therefore
+.B srand()
+in
+.I gawk
+also returns its current seed.
+.PP
+Other new features are:
+The use of multiple
+.B \-f
+options (from MKS
+.IR awk );
+the
+.B ENVIRON
+array; the
+.BR \ea ,
+and
+.BR \ev
+escape sequences (done originally in
+.I gawk
+and fed back into AT&T's); the
+.B tolower()
+and
+.B toupper()
+built-in functions (from AT&T); and the \*(AN C conversion specifications in
+.B printf
+(done first in AT&T's version).
+.SH GNU EXTENSIONS
+.I Gawk
+has a number of extensions to \*(PX
+.IR awk .
+They are described in this section.  All the extensions described here
+can be disabled by
+invoking
+.I gawk
+with the
+.B \-\^\-traditional
+option.
+.PP
+The following features of
+.I gawk
+are not available in
+\*(PX
+.IR awk .
+.RS
+.TP \w'\(bu'u+1n
+\(bu
+The
+.B \ex
+escape sequence.
+(Disabled with
+.BR \-\^\-posix .)
+.TP \w'\(bu'u+1n
+\(bu
+The
+.B fflush()
+function.
+(Disabled with
+.BR \-\^\-posix .)
+.TP
+\(bu
+The
+.BR systime(),
+.BR strftime(),
+and
+.B gensub()
+functions.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The special file names available for I/O redirection are not recognized.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The
+.BR ARGIND ,
+.BR ERRNO ,
+and
+.B RT
+variables are not special.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The
+.B IGNORECASE
+variable and its side-effects are not available.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The
+.B FIELDWIDTHS
+variable and fixed-width field splitting.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The use of
+.B RS
+as a regular expression.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The ability to split out individual characters using the null string
+as the value of
+.BR FS ,
+and as the third argument to
+.BR split() .
+.TP
+\(bu
+No path search is performed for files named via the
+.B \-f
+option.  Therefore the
+.B AWKPATH
+environment variable is not special.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The use of
+.B "nextfile"
+to abandon processing of the current input file.
+.TP
+\(bu
+The use of
+.BI delete " array"
+to delete the entire contents of an array.
+.RE
+.PP
+The AWK book does not define the return value of the
+.B close()
+function.
+.IR Gawk\^ 's
+.B close()
+returns the value from
+.IR fclose (3),
+or
+.IR pclose (3),
+when closing a file or pipe, respectively.
+.PP
+When
+.I gawk
+is invoked with the
+.B \-\^\-traditional
+option,
+if the
+.I fs
+argument to the
+.B \-F
+option is \*(lqt\*(rq, then
+.B FS
+will be set to the tab character.
+Note that typing
+.B "gawk \-F\et \&.\|.\|."
+simply causes the shell to quote the \*(lqt,\*(rq, and does not pass
+\*(lq\et\*(rq to the
+.B \-F
+option.
+Since this is a rather ugly special case, it is not the default behavior.
+This behavior also does not occur if
+.B \-\^\-posix
+has been specified.
+To really get a tab character as the field separator, it is best to use
+quotes:
+.BR "gawk \-F'\et' \&.\|.\|." .
+.ig
+.PP
+If
+.I gawk
+was compiled for debugging, it will
+accept the following additional options:
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B \-Wparsedebug
+.TP
+.PD
+.B \-\^\-parsedebug
+Turn on
+.IR yacc (1)
+or
+.IR bison (1)
+debugging output during program parsing.
+This option should only be of interest to the
+.I gawk
+maintainers, and may not even be compiled into
+.IR gawk .
+..
+.SH HISTORICAL FEATURES
+There are two features of historical \*(AK implementations that
+.I gawk
+supports.
+First, it is possible to call the
+.B length()
+built-in function not only with no argument, but even without parentheses!
+Thus,
+.RS
+.PP
+.ft B
+a = length	# Holy Algol 60, Batman!
+.ft R
+.RE
+.PP
+is the same as either of
+.RS
+.PP
+.ft B
+a = length()
+.br
+a = length($0)
+.ft R
+.RE
+.PP
+This feature is marked as \*(lqdeprecated\*(rq in the \*(PX standard, and
+.I gawk
+will issue a warning about its use if
+.B \-\^\-lint
+is specified on the command line.
+.PP
+The other feature is the use of either the
+.B continue
+or the
+.B break
+statements outside the body of a
+.BR while ,
+.BR for ,
+or
+.B do
+loop.  Traditional \*(AK implementations have treated such usage as
+equivalent to the
+.B next
+statement.
+.I Gawk
+will support this usage if
+.B \-\^\-traditional
+has been specified.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+If
+.B POSIXLY_CORRECT
+exists in the environment, then
+.I gawk
+behaves exactly as if
+.B \-\^\-posix
+had been specified on the command line.
+If
+.B \-\^\-lint
+has been specified,
+.I gawk
+will issue a warning message to this effect.
+.PP
+The
+.B AWKPATH
+environment variable can be used to provide a list of directories that
+.I gawk
+will search when looking for files named via the
+.B \-f
+and
+.B \-\^\-file
+options.
+.SH BUGS
+The
+.B \-F
+option is not necessary given the command line variable assignment feature;
+it remains only for backwards compatibility.
+.PP
+If your system actually has support for
+.B /dev/fd
+and the associated
+.BR /dev/stdin ,
+.BR /dev/stdout ,
+and
+.B /dev/stderr
+files, you may get different output from
+.I gawk
+than you would get on a system without those files.  When
+.I gawk
+interprets these files internally, it synchronizes output to the standard
+output with output to
+.BR /dev/stdout ,
+while on a system with those files, the output is actually to different
+open files.
+Caveat Emptor.
+.PP
+Syntactically invalid single character programs tend to overflow
+the parse stack, generating a rather unhelpful message.  Such programs
+are surprisingly difficult to diagnose in the completely general case,
+and the effort to do so really is not worth it.
+.SH VERSION INFORMATION
+This man page documents
+.IR gawk ,
+version 3.0.6.
+.SH AUTHORS
+The original version of \*(UX
+.I awk
+was designed and implemented by Alfred Aho,
+Peter Weinberger, and Brian Kernighan of AT&T Bell Labs.  Brian Kernighan
+continues to maintain and enhance it.
+.PP
+Paul Rubin and Jay Fenlason,
+of the Free Software Foundation, wrote
+.IR gawk ,
+to be compatible with the original version of
+.I awk
+distributed in Seventh Edition \*(UX.
+John Woods contributed a number of bug fixes.
+David Trueman, with contributions
+from Arnold Robbins, made
+.I gawk
+compatible with the new version of \*(UX
+.IR awk .
+Arnold Robbins is the current maintainer.
+.PP
+The initial DOS port was done by Conrad Kwok and Scott Garfinkle.
+Scott Deifik is the current DOS maintainer.  Pat Rankin did the
+port to VMS, and Michal Jaegermann did the port to the Atari ST.
+The port to OS/2 was done by Kai Uwe Rommel, with contributions and
+help from Darrel Hankerson.  Fred Fish supplied support for the Amiga.
+.SH BUG REPORTS
+If you find a bug in
+.IR gawk ,
+please send electronic mail to
+.BR bug-gawk@gnu.org .
+Please include your operating system and its revision, the version of
+.IR gawk ,
+what C compiler you used to compile it, and a test program
+and data that are as small as possible for reproducing the problem.
+.PP
+Before sending a bug report, please do two things.  First, verify that
+you have the latest version of
+.IR gawk .
+Many bugs (usually subtle ones) are fixed at each release, and if
+yours is out of date, the problem may already have been solved.
+Second, please read this man page and the reference manual carefully to
+be sure that what you think is a bug really is, instead of just a quirk
+in the language.
+.PP
+Whatever you do, do
+.B NOT
+post a bug report in
+.BR comp.lang.awk .
+While the
+.I gawk
+developers occasionally read this newsgroup, posting bug reports there
+is an unreliable way to report bugs.  Instead, please use the electronic mail
+addresses given above.
+.SH ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
+Brian Kernighan of Bell Labs
+provided valuable assistance during testing and debugging.
+We thank him.
+.SH COPYING PERMISSIONS
+Copyright \(co 1996\-2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.PP
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual page provided the copyright notice and this permission
+notice are preserved on all copies.
+.ig
+Permission is granted to process this file through troff and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual page).
+..
+.PP
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual page under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+.PP
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual page into another language, under the above conditions for
+modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in
+a translation approved by the Foundation.
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/gawk.texi b/contrib/awk/doc/gawk.texi
index 3e8e102..2657b14 100644
--- a/contrib/awk/doc/gawk.texi
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/gawk.texi
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 @c I hope this is the right category
 @dircategory Programming Languages
 @direntry
-* Gawk: (gawk.info).           A Text Scanning and Processing Language.
+* Gawk: (gawk).           A Text Scanning and Processing Language.
 @end direntry
 @end ifinfo
 
@@ -21,10 +21,10 @@
 @c applies to, and when the document was updated.
 @set TITLE Effective AWK Programming
 @set SUBTITLE A User's Guide for GNU Awk
-@set PATCHLEVEL 4
+@set PATCHLEVEL 6
 @set EDITION 1.0.@value{PATCHLEVEL}
 @set VERSION 3.0
-@set UPDATE-MONTH April, 1999
+@set UPDATE-MONTH July, 2000
 @iftex
 @set DOCUMENT book
 @end iftex
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ particular records in a file and perform operations upon them.
 This is Edition @value{EDITION} of @cite{@value{TITLE}},
 for the @value{VERSION}.@value{PATCHLEVEL} version of the GNU implementation of AWK.
 
-Copyright (C) 1989, 1991, 92, 93, 96, 97, 98, 99 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1996-2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
@@ -138,31 +138,27 @@ Corporation. @*
 Registered Trademark of Paramount Pictures Corporation. @*
 @c sorry, i couldn't resist
 @sp 3
-Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991, 92, 93, 96, 97, 98, 99 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1996-2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 @sp 2
         
 This is Edition @value{EDITION} of @cite{@value{TITLE}}, @*
 for the @value{VERSION}.@value{PATCHLEVEL} (or later) version of the GNU implementation of AWK.
 
 @sp 2
-@center Published jointly by:
-
-@multitable {Specialized Systems Consultants, Inc. (SSC)} {Boston, MA  02111-1307 USA}
-@item Specialized Systems Consultants, Inc. (SSC) @tab Free Software Foundation
-@item PO Box 55549 @tab 59 Temple Place --- Suite 330
-@item Seattle, WA 98155 USA @tab Boston, MA  02111-1307 USA
-@item Phone: +1-206-782-7733 @tab Phone: +1-617-542-5942
-@item Fax: +1-206-782-7191 @tab Fax: +1-617-542-2652
-@item E-mail: @code{sales@@ssc.com} @tab E-mail: @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
-@item URL: @code{http://www.ssc.com/} @tab URL: @code{http://www.fsf.org/}
-@end multitable
+Published by:
+
+Free Software Foundation @*
+59 Temple Place --- Suite 330 @*
+Boston, MA  02111-1307 USA @*
+Phone: +1-617-542-5942 @*
+Fax: +1-617-542-2652 @*
+Email: @code{gnu@@gnu.org} @*
+URL: @code{http://www.gnu.org/} @*
 
 @sp 1
-@c this ISBN can change! Check with SSC
+@c this ISBN can change!
 @c This one is correct for gawk 3.0 and edition 1.0 from the FSF
 ISBN 1-882114-26-4 @*
-@c This one is correct for gawk 3.0.3 and edition 1.0.3 from SSC
-@c ISBN 1-57831-000-8 @*
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
@@ -178,8 +174,7 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
 except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
 by the Foundation.
 @sp 2
-@c Cover art by Etienne Suvasa.
-Cover art by Amy Wells Wood.
+Cover art by Etienne Suvasa.
 @end titlepage
 
 @c Thanks to Bob Chassell for directions on doing dedications.
@@ -195,6 +190,8 @@ Cover art by Amy Wells Wood.
 @center @i{To Rivka, for the exponential increase.}
 @sp 1
 @center @i{To Nachum, for the added dimension.}
+@sp 1
+@center @i{To Malka, for the new beginning.}
 @page
 @w{ }
 @page
@@ -540,6 +537,8 @@ of AWK.
 @center To Rivka, for the exponential increase.
 @sp 1
 @center To Nachum, for the added dimension.
+@sp 1
+@center To Malka, for the new beginning.
 @end ifinfo
 
 @node Preface, What Is Awk, Top, Top
@@ -2686,7 +2685,7 @@ control how @code{gawk} interprets characters in regexps.
 
 @table @asis
 @item No options
-In the default case, @code{gawk} provide all the facilities of
+In the default case, @code{gawk} provides all the facilities of
 POSIX regexps and the GNU regexp operators described
 @iftex
 above.
@@ -2843,7 +2842,6 @@ $ echo aaaabcd | awk '@{ sub(/a+/, "<A>"); print @}'
 @end example
 
 For simple match/no-match tests, this is not so important. But when doing
-regexp-based field and record splitting, and
 text matching and substitutions with the @code{match}, @code{sub}, @code{gsub},
 and @code{gensub} functions, it is very important.
 @ifinfo
@@ -2871,7 +2869,7 @@ regexp.  A regexp that is computed in this way is called a @dfn{dynamic
 regexp}.  For example:
 
 @example
-BEGIN @{ identifier_regexp = "[A-Za-z_][A-Za-z_0-9]+" @}
+BEGIN @{ identifier_regexp = "[A-Za-z_][A-Za-z_0-9]*" @}
 $0 ~ identifier_regexp    @{ print @}
 @end example
 
@@ -2879,6 +2877,12 @@ $0 ~ identifier_regexp    @{ print @}
 sets @code{identifier_regexp} to a regexp that describes @code{awk}
 variable names, and tests if the input record matches this regexp.
 
+@ignore
+Do we want to use "^[A-Za-z_][A-Za-z_0-9]*$" to restrict the entire
+record to just identifiers?  Doing that also would disrupt the flow of
+the text.
+@end ignore
+
 @strong{Caution:} When using the @samp{~} and @samp{!~}
 operators, there is a difference between a regexp constant
 enclosed in slashes, and a string constant enclosed in double quotes.
@@ -3070,8 +3074,10 @@ is one field, consisting of a newline.  The value of the built-in
 variable @code{NF} is the number of fields in the current record.
 
 @example
+@group
 $ echo | awk 'BEGIN @{ RS = "a" @} ; @{ print NF @}'
 @print{} 1
+@end group
 @end example
 
 @cindex dark corner
@@ -3219,6 +3225,8 @@ when the record has only seven fields, you get the empty string.
 a special case: it represents the whole input record.  @code{$0} is
 used when you are not interested in fields.
 
+@c NEEDED
+@page
 Here are some more examples:
 
 @example
@@ -3613,8 +3621,10 @@ the record, and then decide where the fields are.
 For example, the following pipeline prints @samp{b}:
 
 @example
+@group
 $ echo ' a b c d ' | awk '@{ print $2 @}'
 @print{} b
+@end group
 @end example
 
 @noindent
@@ -3914,17 +3924,19 @@ idle time.  (This program uses a number of @code{awk} features that
 haven't been introduced yet.)
 
 @example
-@group
 BEGIN  @{ FIELDWIDTHS = "9 6 10 6 7 7 35" @}
 NR > 2 @{
     idle = $4
     sub(/^  */, "", idle)   # strip leading spaces
     if (idle == "")
         idle = 0
+@group
     if (idle ~ /:/) @{
         split(idle, t, ":")
         idle = t[1] * 60 + t[2]
     @}
+@end group
+@group
     if (idle ~ /days/)
         idle *= 24 * 60 * 60
  
@@ -4042,6 +4054,8 @@ A practical example of a data file organized this way might be a mailing
 list, where each entry is separated by blank lines.  If we have a mailing
 list in a file named @file{addresses}, that looks like this:
 
+@c NEEDED
+@page
 @example
 Jane Doe
 123 Main Street
@@ -4050,7 +4064,6 @@ Anywhere, SE 12345-6789
 John Smith
 456 Tree-lined Avenue
 Smallville, MW 98765-4321
-
 @dots{}
 @end example
 
@@ -4426,8 +4439,6 @@ each one.
 @c Exercise!!
 @c This example is unrealistic, since you could just use system
 
-@c NEEDED
-@page
 Given the input:
 
 @example
@@ -4974,6 +4985,12 @@ the decimal number eight is represented as @samp{10} in octal.)
 @item s
 This prints a string.
 
+@item u
+This prints an unsigned decimal number.
+(This format is of marginal use, since all numbers in @code{awk}
+are floating point.  It is provided primarily for compatibility
+with C.)
+
 @item x
 @itemx X
 This prints an unsigned hexadecimal integer.
@@ -5525,7 +5542,7 @@ is important to @emph{not} close any of the files related to file descriptors
 0, 1, and 2.  If you do close one of these files, unpredictable behavior
 will result.
 
-The special files that provide process-related information may disappear
+The special files that provide process-related information will disappear
 in a future version of @code{gawk}.
 @xref{Future Extensions, ,Probable Future Extensions}.
 
@@ -5624,6 +5641,8 @@ really do its work until the pipe is closed.  For example, if you
 redirect output to the @code{mail} program, the message is not
 actually sent until the pipe is closed.
 
+@c NEEDED
+@page
 @item
 To run the same program a second time, with the same arguments.
 This is not the same thing as giving more input to the first run!
@@ -6017,8 +6036,8 @@ specifier.
 
 @code{CONVFMT}'s default value is @code{"%.6g"}, which prints a value with
 at least six significant digits.  For some applications you will want to
-change it to specify more precision.  Double precision on most modern
-machines gives you 16 or 17 decimal digits of precision.
+change it to specify more precision.  On most modern machines, you must
+print 17 digits to capture a floating point number's value exactly.
 
 Strange results can happen if you set @code{CONVFMT} to a string that doesn't
 tell @code{sprintf} how to format floating point numbers in a useful way.
@@ -6069,7 +6088,12 @@ for more information on the @code{print} statement.
 
 The @code{awk} language uses the common arithmetic operators when
 evaluating expressions.  All of these arithmetic operators follow normal
-precedence rules, and work as you would expect them to.
+precedence rules, and work as you would expect them to.  Arithmetic
+operations are evaluated using double precision floating point, which
+has the usual problems of inexactness and exceptions.@footnote{David
+Goldberg, @uref{http://www.validgh.com/goldberg/paper.ps, @cite{What Every
+Computer Scientist Should Know About Floating-point Arithmetic}},
+@cite{ACM Computing Surveys} @strong{23}, 1 (1991-03), 5-48.}
 
 Here is a file @file{grades} containing a list of student names and
 three test scores per student (it's a small class):
@@ -6117,7 +6141,7 @@ Multiplication.
 
 @item @var{x} / @var{y}
 Division.  Since all numbers in @code{awk} are
-real numbers, the result is not rounded to an integer: @samp{3 / 4}
+floating point numbers, the result is not rounded to an integer: @samp{3 / 4}
 has the value 0.75.
 
 @item @var{x} % @var{y}
@@ -6976,8 +7000,8 @@ x > 0 ? x : -x
 @end example
 
 Each time the conditional expression is computed, exactly one of
-@var{if-true-exp} and @var{if-false-exp} is computed; the other is ignored.
-This is important when the expressions contain side effects.  For example,
+@var{if-true-exp} and @var{if-false-exp} is used; the other is ignored.
+This is important when the expressions have side effects.  For example,
 this conditional expression examines element @code{i} of either array
 @code{a} or array @code{b}, and increments @code{i}.
 
@@ -7975,9 +7999,11 @@ identifies prime numbers:
 @example
 awk '# find smallest divisor of num
      @{ num = $1
+@group
        for (div = 2; div*div <= num; div++)
          if (num % div == 0)
            break
+@end group
        if (num % div == 0)
          printf "Smallest divisor of %d is %d\n", num, div
        else
@@ -8049,8 +8075,8 @@ of the loop altogether.
 @ignore
 In Texinfo source files, text that the author wishes to ignore can be
 enclosed between lines that start with @samp{@@ignore} and end with
-@samp{@@end ignore}.  Here is a program that strips out lines between
-@samp{@@ignore} and @samp{@@end ignore} pairs.
+@samp{@atend ignore}.  Here is a program that strips out lines between
+@samp{@@ignore} and @samp{@atend ignore} pairs.
 
 @example
 BEGIN @{
@@ -8069,7 +8095,7 @@ BEGIN @{
 @end example
 
 When an @samp{@@ignore} is seen, the @code{ignoring} flag is set to one (true).
-When @samp{@@end ignore} is seen, the flag is reset to zero (false). As long
+When @samp{@atend ignore} is seen, the flag is reset to zero (false). As long
 as the flag is true, the input record is not printed, because the
 @code{continue} restarts the @code{while} loop, skipping over the @code{print}
 statement.
@@ -8778,6 +8804,7 @@ same @code{awk} program.
 * Multi-dimensional::           Emulating multi-dimensional arrays in
                                 @code{awk}.
 * Multi-scanning::              Scanning multi-dimensional arrays.
+* Array Efficiency::            Implementation-specific tips.
 @end menu
 
 @node Array Intro, Reference to Elements, Arrays, Arrays
@@ -9008,12 +9035,14 @@ It is a very simple program, and gets confused if it encounters repeated
 numbers, gaps, or lines that don't begin with a number.
 
 @example
+@group
 @c file eg/misc/arraymax.awk
 @{
   if ($1 > max)
     max = $1
   arr[$1] = $0
 @}
+@end group
 
 END @{
   for (x = 1; x <= max; x++)
@@ -9308,7 +9337,7 @@ output!
 
 At first glance, this program should have worked.  The variable @code{lines}
 is uninitialized, and uninitialized variables have the numeric value zero.
-So, the value of @code{l[0]} should have been printed.
+So, @code{awk} should have printed the value of @code{l[0]}.
 
 The issue here is that subscripts for @code{awk} arrays are @strong{always}
 strings. And uninitialized variables, when used as strings, have the
@@ -9445,7 +9474,7 @@ it produces:
 @end group
 @end example
 
-@node Multi-scanning,  , Multi-dimensional, Arrays
+@node Multi-scanning,  Array Efficiency, Multi-dimensional, Arrays
 @section Scanning Multi-dimensional Arrays
 
 There is no special @code{for} statement for scanning a
@@ -9492,6 +9521,34 @@ The result of this is to set @code{separate[1]} to @code{"1"} and
 @code{separate[2]} to @code{"foo"}.  Presto, the original sequence of
 separate indices has been recovered.
 
+@node Array Efficiency, , Multi-scanning, Arrays
+@section Using Array Memory Efficiently
+
+This section applies just to @code{gawk}.
+
+It is often useful to use the same bit of data as an index
+into multiple arrays.
+Due to the way @code{gawk} implements associative arrays,
+when you need to use input data as an index for multiple
+arrays, it is much more effecient to assign the input field
+to a separate variable, and then use that variable as the index.
+
+@example
+@{
+      name = $1
+      ssn = $2
+      nkids = $3
+      @dots{}
+      seniority[name]++    # better than seniority[$1]++
+      kids[name] = nkids   # better than kids[$1] = nkids
+@}
+@end example
+
+Using separate variables with mnemonic names for the input fields
+makes programs more readable, in any case.
+It is an eventual goal to make @code{gawk}'s array indexing as efficient
+as possible, no matter what the source of the index value.
+
 @node Built-in, User-defined, Arrays, Top
 @chapter Built-in Functions
 
@@ -9625,7 +9682,7 @@ function randint(n) @{
 @end example
 
 @noindent
-The multiplication produces a random real number greater than zero and less
+The multiplication produces a random number greater than zero and less
 than @code{n}.  We then make it an integer (using @code{int}) between zero
 and @code{n} @minus{} 1, inclusive.
 
@@ -9915,10 +9972,10 @@ Here is another example:
 @example
 awk 'BEGIN @{
         str = "daabaaa"
-        sub(/a*/, "c&c", str)
+        sub(/a+/, "C&C", str)
         print str
 @}'
-@print{} dcaacbaaa
+@print{} dCaaCbaaa
 @end example
 
 @noindent
@@ -10229,7 +10286,8 @@ backslash.@footnote{This consequence was certainly unintended.}
 @end enumerate
 
 The POSIX standard is under revision.@footnote{As of @value{UPDATE-MONTH},
-with final approval and publication hopefully sometime in 1997.}
+with final approval and publication as part of the Austin Group
+Standards hopefully sometime in 2001.}
 Because of the above problems, proposed text for the revised standard
 reverts to rules that correspond more closely to the original existing
 practice. The proposed rules have special cases that make it possible
@@ -10981,6 +11039,8 @@ in an array and start over with a new list of elements
 Instead of having
 to repeat this loop everywhere in your program that you need to clear out
 an array, your program can just call @code{delarray}.
+(This guarantees portability.  The usage @samp{delete @var{array}} to delete
+the contents of an entire array is a non-standard extension.)
 
 Here is an example of a recursive function.  It takes a string
 as an input parameter, and returns the string in backwards order.
@@ -11012,11 +11072,11 @@ formatted in a well known fashion.  Here is an @code{awk} version:
 
 @example
 @c file eg/lib/ctime.awk
-@group
 # ctime.awk
 #
 # awk version of C ctime(3) function
 
+@group
 function ctime(ts,    format)
 @{
     format = "%a %b %d %H:%M:%S %Z %Y"
@@ -11113,10 +11173,12 @@ doing.}  For example:
 @end iftex
 
 @example
+@group
 function changeit(array, ind, nvalue)
 @{
      array[ind] = nvalue
 @}
+@end group
 
 BEGIN @{
     a[1] = 1; a[2] = 2; a[3] = 3
@@ -11355,6 +11417,11 @@ The @samp{-v} option can only set one variable, but you can use
 it more than once, setting another variable each time, like this:
 @samp{awk @w{-v foo=1} @w{-v bar=2} @dots{}}.
 
+@strong{Caution:}  Using @samp{-v} to set the values of the builtin
+variables may lead to suprising results.  @code{awk} will reset the
+values of those variables as it needs to, possibly ignoring any
+predefined value you may have given.
+
 @item -mf @var{NNN}
 @itemx -mr @var{NNN}
 Set various memory limits to the value @var{NNN}.  The @samp{f} flag sets
@@ -11656,7 +11723,7 @@ separated by colons.  @code{gawk} gets its search path from the
 @code{AWKPATH} environment variable.  If that variable does not exist,
 @code{gawk} uses a default path, which is
 @samp{.:/usr/local/share/awk}.@footnote{Your version of @code{gawk}
-may use a directory that is different than @file{/usr/local/share/awk}; it
+may use a different directory; it
 will depend upon how @code{gawk} was built and installed. The actual
 directory will be the value of @samp{$(datadir)} generated when
 @code{gawk} was configured.  You probably don't need to worry about this
@@ -11958,7 +12025,6 @@ it should stop when it gets to the end of the first occurrence.
 Here is a second version of @code{nextfile} that remedies this problem.
 
 @example
-@group
 @c file eg/lib/nextfile.awk
 # nextfile --- skip remaining records in current file
 # correctly handle successive occurrences of the same file
@@ -11969,14 +12035,15 @@ Here is a second version of @code{nextfile} that remedies this problem.
 
 function nextfile()   @{ _abandon_ = FILENAME; next @}
 
+@group
 _abandon_ == FILENAME @{
       if (FNR == 1)
           _abandon_ = ""
       else
           next
 @}
-@c endfile
 @end group
+@c endfile
 @end example
 
 The @code{nextfile} function has not changed.  It sets @code{_abandon_}
@@ -12029,6 +12096,8 @@ print a diagnostic message describing the condition that should have
 been true but was not, and then it kills the program.  In C, using
 @code{assert} looks this:
 
+@c NEEDED
+@page
 @example
 #include <assert.h>
 
@@ -12093,6 +12162,8 @@ program's @code{END} rules will execute.
 For all of this to work correctly, @file{assert.awk} must be the
 first source file read by @code{awk}.
 
+@c NEEDED
+@page
 You would use this function in your programs this way:
 
 @example
@@ -12158,10 +12229,12 @@ function round(x,   ival, aval, fraction)
       aval = -x     # absolute value
       ival = int(aval)
       fraction = aval - ival
+@group
       if (fraction >= .5)
          return int(x) - 1   # -2.5 --> -3
       else
          return int(x)       # -2.3 --> -2
+@end group
    @} else @{
       fraction = x - ival
       if (fraction >= .5)
@@ -12283,7 +12356,7 @@ function chr(c)
 @c endfile
 @end group
 
-@c @group
+@group
 @c file eg/lib/ord.awk
 #### test code ####
 # BEGIN    \
@@ -12296,7 +12369,7 @@ function chr(c)
 #    @}
 # @}
 @c endfile
-@c @end group
+@end group
 @end example
 
 An obvious improvement to these functions would be to move the code for the
@@ -12381,7 +12454,11 @@ date into a timestamp.
 It would appear at first glance that @code{gawk} would have to supply a
 @code{mktime} built-in function that was simply a ``hook'' to the C language
 version.  In fact though, @code{mktime} can be implemented entirely in
-@code{awk}.
+@code{awk}.@footnote{@value{UPDATE-MONTH}: Actually, I was mistaken when
+I wrote this.  The version presented here doesn't always work correctly,
+and the next major version of @code{gawk} will provide @code{mktime}
+as a built-in function.}
+@c sigh.
 
 Here is a version of @code{mktime} for @code{awk}.  It takes a simple
 representation of the date and time, and converts it into a timestamp.
@@ -12630,13 +12707,14 @@ to the original result.  An example demonstrating this is presented below.
 Finally, there is a ``main'' program for testing the function.
 
 @example
+@c there used to be a blank line after the getline,
+@c squished out for page formatting reasons
 @c @group
 @c file eg/lib/mktime.awk
 BEGIN  @{
     if (_tm_test) @{
         printf "Enter date as yyyy mm dd hh mm ss: "
         getline _tm_test_date
-    
         t = mktime(_tm_test_date)
         r = strftime("%Y %m %d %H %M %S", t)
         printf "Got back (%s)\n", r
@@ -12722,7 +12800,6 @@ time formatted in the same way as the @code{date} utility.
 #    time["timezone"]     -- abbreviation of timezone name
 #    time["ampm"]         -- AM or PM designation
 
-@group
 function gettimeofday(time,    ret, now, i)
 @{
     # get time once, avoids unnecessary system calls
@@ -12734,9 +12811,7 @@ function gettimeofday(time,    ret, now, i)
     # clear out target array
     for (i in time)
         delete time[i]
-@end group
 
-@group
     # fill in values, force numeric values to be
     # numeric by adding 0
     time["second"]       = strftime("%S", now) + 0
@@ -12761,7 +12836,6 @@ function gettimeofday(time,    ret, now, i)
 
     return ret
 @}
-@end group
 @c endfile
 @end example
 
@@ -13569,9 +13643,11 @@ char **argv;
     int i;
 @end group
 
+@group
     while ((g = getgrent()) != NULL) @{
         printf("%s:%s:%d:", g->gr_name, g->gr_passwd,
                                             g->gr_gid);
+@end group
         for (i = 0; g->gr_mem[i] != NULL; i++) @{
             printf("%s", g->gr_mem[i]);
             if (g->gr_mem[i+1] != NULL)
@@ -14074,11 +14150,11 @@ BEGIN    \
         if (c == "f") @{
             by_fields = 1
             fieldlist = Optarg
-@group
         @} else if (c == "c") @{
             by_chars = 1
             fieldlist = Optarg
             OFS = ""
+@group
         @} else if (c == "d") @{
             if (length(Optarg) > 1) @{
                 printf("Using first character of %s" \
@@ -14304,8 +14380,6 @@ Normally, @code{egrep} prints the
 lines that matched.  If multiple file names are provided on the command
 line, each output line is preceded by the name of the file and a colon.
 
-@c NEEDED
-@page
 The options are:
 
 @table @code
@@ -14457,7 +14531,7 @@ processed.  Finally, @code{fcount} is added to @code{total}, so that we
 know how many lines altogether matched the pattern.
 
 @example
-@c @group
+@group
 @c file eg/prog/egrep.awk
 function endfile(file)
 @{
@@ -14470,7 +14544,7 @@ function endfile(file)
     total += fcount
 @}
 @c endfile
-@c @end group
+@end group
 @end example
 
 This rule does most of the work of matching lines. The variable
@@ -14520,10 +14594,8 @@ necessary.
 
     fcount += matches    # 1 or 0
 
-@group
     if (! matches)
         next
-@end group
 
     if (no_print && ! count_only)
         nextfile
@@ -14535,8 +14607,10 @@ necessary.
 
     if (do_filenames && ! count_only)
         print FILENAME ":" $0
+@group
     else if (! count_only)
         print
+@end group
 @}
 @c endfile
 @c @end group
@@ -15032,7 +15106,6 @@ standard output, @file{/dev/stdout}.
 
 @findex uniq.awk
 @example
-@c @group
 @c file eg/prog/uniq.awk
 # uniq.awk --- do uniq in awk
 # Arnold Robbins, arnold@@gnu.org, Public Domain
@@ -15047,15 +15120,13 @@ function usage(    e)
 @}
 @end group
 
-@group
 # -c    count lines. overrides -d and -u
 # -d    only repeated lines
 # -u    only non-repeated lines
 # -n    skip n fields
 # +n    skip n characters, skip fields first
-@end group
 
-BEGIN    \
+BEGIN   \
 @{
     count = 1
     outputfile = "/dev/stdout"
@@ -15072,10 +15143,12 @@ BEGIN    \
             # this messes us up for things like -5
             if (Optarg ~ /^[0-9]+$/)
                 fcount = (c Optarg) + 0
+@group
             else @{
                 fcount = c + 0
                 Optind--
             @}
+@end group
         @} else
             usage()
     @}
@@ -15091,14 +15164,12 @@ BEGIN    \
     if (repeated_only == 0 && non_repeated_only == 0)
         repeated_only = non_repeated_only = 1
 
-@group
     if (ARGC - Optind == 2) @{
         outputfile = ARGV[ARGC - 1]
         ARGV[ARGC - 1] = ""
     @}
 @}
 @c endfile
-@end group
 @end example
 
 The following function, @code{are_equal}, compares the current line,
@@ -15315,23 +15386,22 @@ for the file that was just read. It relies on @code{beginfile} to reset the
 numbers for the following data file.
 
 @example
-@c @group
+@c left brace on line with `function' because of page breaking
 @c file eg/prog/wc.awk
-function beginfile(file)
-@{
+@group
+function beginfile(file) @{
     chars = lines = words = 0
     fname = FILENAME
 @}
+@end group
 
 function endfile(file)
 @{
     tchars += chars
     tlines += lines
     twords += words
-@group
     if (do_lines)
         printf "\t%d", lines
-@end group
     if (do_words)
         printf "\t%d", words
     if (do_chars)
@@ -15339,7 +15409,6 @@ function endfile(file)
     printf "\t%s\n", fname
 @}
 @c endfile
-@c @end group
 @end example
 
 There is one rule that is executed for each line. It adds the length of the
@@ -15565,11 +15634,12 @@ message in a loop, again using @code{sleep} to delay for however many
 seconds are necessary.
 
 @example
-@c @group
 @c file eg/prog/alarm.awk
+@group
     # zzzzzz..... go away if interrupted
     if (system(sprintf("sleep %d", naptime)) != 0)
         exit 1
+@end group
 
     # time to notify!
     command = sprintf("sleep %d", delay)
@@ -15583,7 +15653,6 @@ seconds are necessary.
     exit 0
 @}
 @c endfile
-@c @end group
 @end example
 
 @node Translate Program, Labels Program, Alarm Program, Miscellaneous Programs
@@ -15625,7 +15694,7 @@ functions
 (@pxref{String Functions, ,Built-in Functions for String Manipulation}).@footnote{This
 program was written before @code{gawk} acquired the ability to
 split each character in a string into separate array elements.
-How might this ability simplify the program?}
+How might you use this new feature to simplify the program?}
 
 There are two functions.  The first, @code{stranslate}, takes three
 arguments.
@@ -15683,19 +15752,19 @@ function stranslate(from, to, target,     lf, lt, t_ar, i, c)
     return target
 @}
 
-@group
 function translate(from, to)
 @{
     return $0 = stranslate(from, to, $0)
 @}
-@end group
 
+@group
 # main program
 BEGIN @{
     if (ARGC < 3) @{
         print "usage: translate from to" > "/dev/stderr"
         exit
     @}
+@end group
     FROM = ARGV[1]
     TO = ARGV[2]
     ARGC = 2
@@ -15852,10 +15921,12 @@ awk '
         freq[$i]++
 @}
 
+@group
 END @{
     for (word in freq)
         printf "%s\t%d\n", word, freq[word]
 @}'
+@end group
 @end example
 
 The first thing to notice about this program is that it has two rules.  The
@@ -15914,10 +15985,12 @@ the program:
 @}
 @c endfile
 
+@group
 END @{
     for (word in freq)
         printf "%s\t%d\n", word, freq[word]
 @}
+@end group
 @end example
 
 Assuming we have saved this program in a file named @file{wordfreq.awk},
@@ -16126,8 +16199,7 @@ exited with a zero exit status, signifying OK.
 @c file eg/prog/extract.awk
 # extract.awk --- extract files and run programs
 #                 from texinfo files
-# Arnold Robbins, arnold@@gnu.org, Public Domain
-# May 1993
+# Arnold Robbins, arnold@@gnu.org, Public Domain, May 1993
 
 BEGIN    @{ IGNORECASE = 1 @}
 
@@ -16315,18 +16387,18 @@ are provided, the standard input is used.
 # Arnold Robbins, arnold@@gnu.org, Public Domain
 # August 1995
 
-@group
 function usage()
 @{
     print "usage: awksed pat repl [files...]" > "/dev/stderr"
     exit 1
 @}
-@end group
 
+@group
 BEGIN @{
     # validate arguments
     if (ARGC < 3)
         usage()
+@end group
 
     RS = ARGV[1]
     ORS = ARGV[2]
@@ -16515,7 +16587,6 @@ argument (e.g., @samp{--file=}).
 The source text is echoed into @file{/tmp/ig.s.$$}.
 
 @item --version
-@itemx --version
 @itemx -Wversion
 @code{igawk} prints its version number, and runs @samp{gawk --version}
 to get the @code{gawk} version information, and then exits.
@@ -16660,11 +16731,13 @@ slower.
 @end ignore
 
 @example
-@c @group
 @c file eg/prog/igawk.sh
 gawk -- '
 # process @@include directives
+@c endfile
 
+@group
+@c file eg/prog/igawk.sh
 function pathto(file,    i, t, junk)
 @{
     if (index(file, "/") != 0)
@@ -16681,7 +16754,7 @@ function pathto(file,    i, t, junk)
     return ""
 @}
 @c endfile
-@c @end group
+@end group
 @end example
 
 The main program is contained inside one @code{BEGIN} rule.  The first thing it
@@ -18068,19 +18141,19 @@ Prints expressions, sending the output down a pipe to @var{command}.
 The pipeline to the command stays open until the @code{close} function
 is called.
 
-@item printf @var{fmt, expr-list}
+@item printf @var{fmt}, @var{expr-list}
 Format and print.
 
-@item printf @var{fmt, expr-list} > file
+@item printf @var{fmt}, @var{expr-list} > @var{file}
 Format and print to @var{file}. If @var{file} does not exist, it is
 created. If it does exist, its contents are deleted the first time the
 @code{printf} is executed.
 
-@item printf @var{fmt, expr-list} >> @var{file}
+@item printf @var{fmt}, @var{expr-list} >> @var{file}
 Format and print to @var{file}.  The previous contents of @var{file}
 are retained, and the output of @code{printf} is appended to the file.
 
-@item printf @var{fmt, expr-list} | @var{command}
+@item printf @var{fmt}, @var{expr-list} | @var{command}
 Format and print, sending the output down a pipe to @var{command}.
 The pipeline to the command stays open until the @code{close} function
 is called.
@@ -18128,7 +18201,10 @@ string, with non-significant zeros suppressed.
 @samp{%G} will use @samp{%E} instead of @samp{%e}.
 
 @item %o
-An unsigned octal number (again, an integer).
+An unsigned octal number (also an integer).
+
+@item %u
+An unsigned decimal number (again, an integer).
 
 @item %s
 A character string.
@@ -18256,6 +18332,8 @@ provides the motivation for this feature.
 @code{awk} provides a number of built-in functions for performing
 numeric operations, string related operations, and I/O related operations.
 
+@c NEEDED
+@page
 The built-in arithmetic functions are:
 
 @table @code
@@ -18592,7 +18670,8 @@ Free Software Foundation @*
 Boston, MA  02111-1307 USA @*
 Phone: +1-617-542-5942 @*
 Fax (including Japan): +1-617-542-2652 @*
-E-mail: @code{gnu@@gnu.org} @*
+Email: @code{gnu@@gnu.org} @*
+URL: @code{http://www.gnu.org/} @*
 @end quotation
 
 @noindent
@@ -18617,6 +18696,8 @@ You should use a site that is geographically close to you.
 @itemx utsun.s.u-tokyo.ac.jp:/ftpsync/prep
 @end table
 
+@c NEEDED
+@page
 @item Australia:
 @table @code
 @item archie.au:/gnu
@@ -19412,22 +19493,13 @@ some idea of what kind of Unix system you're using, and the exact results
 @code{gawk} gave you.  Also say what you expected to occur; this will help
 us decide whether the problem was really in the documentation.
 
-Once you have a precise problem, there are two e-mail addresses you
-can send mail to.
-
-@table @asis
-@item Internet:
-@samp{bug-gnu-utils@@gnu.org}
-
-@item UUCP:
-@samp{uunet!gnu.org!bug-gnu-utils}
-@end table
+Once you have a precise problem, send email to @email{bug-gawk@@gnu.org}.
 
-Please include the
-version number of @code{gawk} you are using.  You can get this information
-with the command @samp{gawk --version}.
-You should send a carbon copy of your mail to Arnold Robbins, who can
-be reached at @samp{arnold@@gnu.org}.
+Please include the version number of @code{gawk} you are using.
+You can get this information with the command @samp{gawk --version}.
+Using this address will automatically send a carbon copy of your
+mail to Arnold Robbins.  If necessary, he can be reached directly at
+@email{arnold@@gnu.org}.
 
 @cindex @code{comp.lang.awk}
 @strong{Important!} Do @emph{not} try to report bugs in @code{gawk} by
@@ -19514,8 +19586,8 @@ retrieve @file{awk.bundle.gz}.
 This is a shell archive that has been compressed with the GNU @code{gzip}
 utility. It can be uncompressed with the @code{gunzip} utility.
 
-You can also retrieve this version via the World Wide Web from
-@uref{http://cm.bell-labs.com/who/bwk, Brian Kernighan's home page}.
+You can also retrieve this version via the World Wide Web from his
+@uref{http://cm.bell-labs.com/who/bwk, home page}.
 
 This version requires an ANSI C compiler; GCC (the GNU C compiler)
 works quite nicely.
@@ -19729,6 +19801,11 @@ Using this format makes it easy for me to apply your changes to the
 master version of the @code{gawk} source code (using @code{patch}).
 If I have to apply the changes manually, using a text editor, I may
 not do so, particularly if there are lots of changes.
+
+@item
+Include an entry for the @file{ChangeLog} file with your submission.
+This further helps minimize the amount of work I have to do,
+making it easier for me to accept patches.
 @end enumerate
 
 Although this sounds like a lot of work, please remember that while you
@@ -19736,6 +19813,7 @@ may write the new code, I have to maintain it and support it, and if it
 isn't possible for me to do that with a minimum of extra work, then I
 probably will not.
 
+
 @node New Ports, , Adding Code, Additions
 @appendixsubsec Porting @code{gawk} to a New Operating System
 
@@ -19900,7 +19978,7 @@ It may be possible to map a GDBM/NDBM/SDBM file into an @code{awk} array.
 @item A @code{PROCINFO} Array
 The special files that provide process-related information
 (@pxref{Special Files, ,Special File Names in @code{gawk}})
-may be superseded by a @code{PROCINFO} array that would provide the same
+will be superseded by a @code{PROCINFO} array that would provide the same
 information, in an easier to access fashion.
 
 @item More @code{lint} warnings
@@ -20771,7 +20849,7 @@ the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
 
 @smallexample
 @var{one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.}
-Copyright (C) 19@var{yy}  @var{name of author}
+Copyright (C) @var{year}  @var{name of author}
 
 This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
@@ -20794,7 +20872,7 @@ If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
 when it starts in an interactive mode:
 
 @smallexample
-Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{name of author}
 Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
 type `show w'.  This is free software, and you are welcome
 to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' 
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/igawk.1 b/contrib/awk/doc/igawk.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08173ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/igawk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+.TH IGAWK 1 "Nov 3 1999" "Free Software Foundation" "Utility Commands"
+.SH NAME
+igawk \- gawk with include files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B igawk
+[ all
+.I gawk
+options ]
+.B \-f
+.I program-file
+[
+.B \-\^\-
+] file .\^.\^.
+.br
+.B igawk
+[ all
+.I gawk
+options ]
+[
+.B \-\^\-
+]
+.I program-text
+file .\^.\^.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Igawk
+is a simple shell script that adds the ability to have ``include files'' to
+.IR gawk (1).
+.PP
+AWK programs for
+.I igawk
+are the same as for
+.IR gawk ,
+except that, in addition, you may have lines like
+.RS
+.sp
+.ft B
+@include getopt.awk
+.ft R
+.sp
+.RE
+in your program to include the file
+.B getopt.awk
+from either the current directory or one of the other directories
+in the search path.
+.SH OPTIONS
+See
+.IR gawk (1)
+for a full description of the AWK language and the options that
+.I gawk
+supports.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.nf
+.ft B
+cat << EOF > test.awk
+@include getopt.awk
+.sp
+BEGIN {
+	while (getopt(ARGC, ARGV, "am:q") != \-1)
+		\&.\^.\^.
+}
+EOF
+.sp
+igawk \-f test.awk
+.ft R
+.fi
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR gawk (1)
+.PP
+.IR "Effective AWK Programming" ,
+Edition 1.0, published by the Free Software Foundation, 1995.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Arnold Robbins
+.RB ( arnold@skeeve.com ).
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/macros b/contrib/awk/doc/macros
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bdfc5c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/macros
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+.\" SSC Reference card macros
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 1996, Specialized System Consultants Inc. (SSC)
+.\" 
+.\" These macros are free software; you can redistribute them and/or modify
+.\" them under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+.\" (at your option) any later version.
+.\" 
+.\" These macros are distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
+.\" 
+.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+.\" along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+.\" Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA
+.\"
+.\"	Generic SSC "card" macros
+.\"     based on lots of other macros
+.\"     Last update: 4-25-91 ph
+.\"     attempting to get margins in the boxes Aug  3 09:43:48 PDT 1994
+.ll 3i		\" length of text line
+.lt 3.2i	\" length of title line 
+.de BT	\" bottom of page trap
+.sp |8.2i		\" go to where we put footer
+.ie \\n(CL=1 \{\
+.	nr CL 2
+.tl ''\\*(CD\\n+(PN''	\" footer is just page number
+.	po 4i		\" go to second column
+.TP			\" print header if any
+\}
+.el \{\
+.	nr CL 1
+.tl ''\\*(CD\\n+(PN''	\" footer is just page number
+.	po .5i		\" go to first column
+.	bp		\" force a new page (which will force header)
+.	TP
+\}
+..
+.de TP	\" top of page
+.\" .sp |.2i
+.sp |0
+.\" put page header stuff here 
+.\" for example: .tl ''WOW!''
+.\".sp
+..
+.\" .wh 8.1i BT 		\" set bottom of column trap
+.nf			\" don't fill lines
+.nh			\" no hyphenation
+.nr CL 1		\" start with column = 1
+.po .5i			\" offset for first column
+.vs 9			\" line spacing
+.ps 8			\" point size
+.de ST	\" set tabs to normal places
+.ta .2i .78i 1.2i 1.7i	\" set tabs 
+..
+.ig
+    From: bryang@chinet.chi.il.us (Bryan Glennon)
+    Box macro.  Do a .mk z where the box is to start, and a .eb
+    where it is to end.  Optional argument is a title to be centered
+    within the top box line.
+   
+    Usage:
+   
+     .mk z
+     Text, etc to be boxed...
+     .eb "Optional title goes here"
+    
+     ~or~
+   
+     .mk z
+     Text, etc to be boxed...
+     .eb 
+   
+   
+    Some explanation:
+     The macro name is eb <.de eb>.  First thing we do is to go up on line
+     <.sp -1> and turn off fill mode <.nf>.  Now it gets interesting: the
+    .ie is the if/else construct.  We check the number of arguments provided
+    to the macro <\\n(.$> and if it is greater than 0 (meaning we have a title),
+    we do the rest of the .ie line, as follows:
+   
+                         \h'-.5n'     - move left one-half of an n
+                         \L'|\\nzu-1' - draw a vertical line <\L> to the 
+                                        absolute position (|) given by \\nzu-1,
+                                        which is the position set with the .mk 
+                                        command into register z <\\nz> in base 
+                                        units <u> minus 1.
+    \l'(\\n(.lu+1n-\w'\\$1'u/2u)\(ul' - Draw a horizontal line <\l> with length
+                                        equal to the current line length 
+                                        <\\n(.l> in base units <u> plus the 
+                                        space required for an 'n' <1n>, minus 
+                                        the width <\w> of the title string 
+                                        <\\$1> in base units <u> divided by 2 
+                                        <in base units <u>>.  Draw the line 
+                                        using the underline character, <\(ul>.
+             \v'.3m'\|\\$1\|\v'-.3m' -  Move down the page 3/10 of an m,
+                                        <\v'.3m'>, output a 1/6 of an m space
+                                        <\|>, output the title <\\$1>, another
+                                        1/6 of an m space <\|>, and then move
+                                        up the page 3/10 of an m <\v'-.3m'>.
+                         \l'...\(ul' -  Draw the second part of the line, just
+                                        like the corresponding left half done
+                                        before.
+                       \L'-|\\nzu+1' -  Draw a verticle line <\L> going down
+                                        the absolute distance <-|> from where 
+                                        the macro was given to where the start 
+                                        point was marked <\\nz> in base units
+                                        <u> plus one line <+1>
+                     \l'|0u-.5n\(ul' -  Draw a horizontal line to the absolute
+                                        position (|0) when the macro was 
+                                        invoked, minus half an n <-.5n> using
+                                        the underline character <\(ul>.
+   
+       The .el beings the else part, which is identical to the above, except
+       the string dosen't get printed.  This makes the printing of the top
+       line much easier: just draw a line <\l> with width equal to the
+       current line plus the witdh of an n <\\n(.l+1n> using the underline
+       character <.\(ul>.
+..
+.de ES	\" start "text in a box"
+.mk z
+.in +.5n
+.ll -.5n
+.sp 1.3
+..
+.de EB	\" end "text in a box" -- optional box title as argument
+.sp -.6
+.nf
+.in -.5n
+.ll +.5n
+.ie \\n(.$\
+\L'|\\nzu'\
+\l'(\\n(.lu-\w'\\$1'u)/2u-.33m\(ul'\
+\v'.3m'\|\\$1\|\v'-.3m'\
+\l'(\\n(.lu-\w'\\$1'u)/2u\(ul'\
+\L'-|\\nzu'\
+\l'|0u\(ul'
+.el \h'-.5n'\L'|\\nzu-1'\l'\\n(.lu+1n\(ul'\L'-|\\nzu+1'\l'|0u-.5n\(ul'
+.in 0
+..
+.de SL	\" draw single line (works in non-fill mode only)
+.sp -.8
+.ti 0
+\l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+..
+.de Hl \" draw horizontal line
+.br
+.ti 0
+\l'\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu'
+.br
+..
+.de DL	\" draw double line (works in non-fill mode only)
+.sp -.8
+.ti 0
+\l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.sp -.8
+.ti 0
+\l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+..
+.ST
+.nr PN 0 1	\" sets starting page number and auto-increment
+.\" must define page header (if any) before here
+.TP
+.ds 3) \|\v'3p'\s+5\z\(sq\s0\v'-3p'\h'1.25p'\v'-.5p'3\v'.5p'\h'2p'
+.\" old one .ds 2) \h'-1.5p'\v'1p'\s+4\z\(ci\s0\v'-1p'\h'3.25p'2
+.ds 2) \|\v'-2.4p'\D'c.095id'\h'-5.15p'\v'2.4p'2\h'1.9p'
+.ds dC \v'1p'\s+5\(bu\s0\v'-1p'\" for development commands
+.ds tC \s+2\(dm\s0\" (for DWB) should be a triangle
+.ds tP \s+2\(dm\s0\" (for other text processing) should be a triangle
+.\" various trademark symbols
+.ds Tm \v'-0.5m'\s8TM\s0\v'0.5m'
+.ds Ts \v'-0.5m'\s4TM\s0\v'0.5m'
+.ig ++
+.\" mount Serifa fonts
+.fp 5 SR
+.fp 6 SB
+.fp 4 Si
+.++
+.\" other assorted junk
+.lg 0
+.\" Fl requires extended version of troff
+.de Fl \" draw fat horizontal line
+.br
+.ti 0
+.ruw 1.5p
+\l'\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu'
+.br
+.ruw
+..
+.de Bx \" box for keys in text
+\\$3\&\|\&\c
+\s-3\(br\|\fH\v'.18n'\\$1\v'-.18n\fP\|\(br\l'|0\(rn'\l'|0\(ul'\&\s0\|\\$2
+..
+.de Fn	\" function name - left justified, gray background
+.\" bold with gray for function name
+.ns
+.br
+\ 
+.ns
+.br
+\!! gsave ( ) stringwidth neg 0 rmoveto
+\!! /Serifa-Bold findfont 8 scalefont setfont
+\!! (\\$1) dup stringwidth pop 6 gsave dup 0 exch rlineto neg exch 0 rlineto
+\!! 0 exch rlineto closepath .9 setgray fill grestore show
+\!! grestore
+.nf
+.rs
+..
+.rs
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/no.colors b/contrib/awk/doc/no.colors
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..974f985
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/no.colors
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+.\" AWK Reference Card --- Arnold Robbins, arnold@gnu.org
+.\" This file is for troff which does not know what to do
+.\" with a literal Poscript and cannot use macros from 'colors'.
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+.\" this reference card provided the copyright notice and this permission
+.\" notice are preserved on all copies.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to process this file through troff and print the
+.\" results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+.\" notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+.\" (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed reference card).
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+.\" reference card under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+.\" permission notice identical to this one.
+.\" 
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+.\" reference card into another language, under the above conditions for
+.\" modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in
+.\" a translation approved by the Foundation.
+.\"
+.ds CR
+.ds CG
+.ds CL
+.ds CB
+.ds CD
+.ds CX
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/setter.outline b/contrib/awk/doc/setter.outline
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67ade73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/setter.outline
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+% SSC Reference card typesetter outline / cut marks
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1996, Specialized System Consultants Inc. (SSC)
+% 
+% This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+% it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+% the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+% (at your option) any later version.
+% 
+% This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+% GNU General Public License for more details.
+% 
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+% Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA
+%
+%! page cut marks and stuff for Pocket References - 10-26-88 - ph
+%! modified to move the cut marks onto the page
+%! center a string
+/inch {72 mul} def
+/cshow  % stk: string 
+	% center string in space (space us variable)
+	{
+	dup stringwidth pop	% get length of string
+	space exch sub 2 div	% compute initial space needed
+	0 rmoveto		% move over
+	show
+	} def
+
+/flashme
+{	/space 612 def
+	0 0 0 setrgbcolor	% always print this stuff
+
+	/Helvetica findfont 12 scalefont setfont
+	gsave
+% for groff (I hope)
+	-6 -6 translate
+	0.2 setlinewidth
+
+	0.25 inch 10.5 inch moveto
+	0.5 inch 10.5 inch lineto
+	.75 inch 10.75 inch moveto
+	.75 inch 11 inch lineto
+	stroke
+
+	0.25 inch 2 inch moveto
+	0.5 inch 2 inch lineto
+	.75 inch 1.75 inch moveto
+	.75 inch 1.50 inch lineto
+	stroke
+	4.25 inch 11 inch moveto
+	4.25 inch 10.75 inch lineto
+	stroke
+
+	4.25 inch 1.75 inch moveto	
+	4.25 inch 1.5 inch lineto
+	stroke
+
+	7.75 inch 1.5 inch moveto
+	7.75 inch 1.75 inch lineto
+	8 inch 2 inch moveto
+	8.25 inch 2 inch lineto
+	stroke
+
+	7.75 inch 11 inch moveto
+	7.75 inch 10.75 inch lineto
+	8 inch 10.5 inch moveto
+	8.25 inch 10.5 inch lineto
+	stroke
+	grestore
+	} def
+
+% actually do something
+
diff --git a/contrib/awk/doc/texinfo.tex b/contrib/awk/doc/texinfo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ebf58d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/awk/doc/texinfo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,5992 @@
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{1999-10-01.07}
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99
+% Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
+%   (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
+%   ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+%   ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+%   (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list).
+%   /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
+% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+% Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/.
+%
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   texindex foo.??
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+%
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
+% the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/.
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen \bindingoffset
+\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\else
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
+   \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\fi
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+  %
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+        \vtop to0pt{%
+          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          }%
+          \vss}%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \unvbox\headlinebox
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \vbox to0pt{\vss
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          }%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+        }%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+  \advancepageno
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+  \let\next = #1%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+  \else
+    \expandafter\parseargline
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    %
+    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+    %
+    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \ignoreactivespaces
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+  %
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+    \else
+      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
+% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
+\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
+\def\singlespace{%
+  % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
+  % environments.  --karl, 6may93
+  %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
+  %\kern \baselineskip}%
+  \setleading \singlespaceskip
+}
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
+  \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
+  @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
+  @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
+@endgroup
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
+  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+  % above.  But it's pretty close.
+  \def\Egroup{%
+    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+    \endgroup         % End the \group.
+  }%
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
+    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+    \everypar = {\strut}%
+    %
+    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+    % normal interline spacing.
+    \offinterlineskip
+    %
+    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
+    % empty paragraph.
+    \ifx\par\lisppar
+      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+      %
+      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+      \obeylines
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
+  \dimen0 = #1\mil
+  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
+  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
+  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
+    %
+    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
+    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
+    % And a page break here is fine.
+    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
+    %
+    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+    %
+    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+    \penalty9999
+    %
+    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+    \kern -#1\mil
+    %
+    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 2em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+  \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
+
+% @page    forces the start of a new page
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
+
+\def\inmargin#1{%
+\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
+  \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+
+%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
+% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\\=12
+  \catcode`~=12
+  \catcode`^=12
+  \catcode`_=12
+  \catcode`|=12
+  \catcode`<=12
+  \catcode`>=12
+  \catcode`+=12
+  \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line   outputs that line, centered
+
+\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
+\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+\centerline{#1}}}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+% 
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+\def\noneword{none}
+%
+\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
+\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \defaultparindent = 0pt
+    \else
+      \defaultparindent = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+}
+
+% @exampleindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
+% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
+% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
+\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
+\def\doexampleindent#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
+    \else
+      \lispnarrowing = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math means output in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
+% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then,
+% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
+% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a
+% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
+%
+% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
+% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $
+\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+   \iflinks
+     \readauxfile
+   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+   \openindices
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   %
+   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
+   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+   \closein1
+   \temp
+   %
+   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+%
+\def\openindices{%
+  \newindex{cp}%
+  \newcodeindex{fn}%
+  \newcodeindex{vr}%
+  \newcodeindex{tp}%
+  \newcodeindex{ky}%
+  \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{pdf,}
+% adobe `portable' document format
+\newcount\tempnum
+\newcount\lnkcount
+\newtoks\filename
+\newcount\filenamelength
+\newcount\pgn
+\newtoks\toksA
+\newtoks\toksB
+\newtoks\toksC
+\newtoks\toksD
+\newbox\boxA
+\newcount\countA
+\newif\ifpdf
+\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+
+\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+  \pdffalse
+  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+  \let\endlink = \relax
+  \let\linkcolor = \relax
+  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\else
+  \pdftrue
+  \pdfoutput = 1
+  \input pdfcolor
+  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
+    \def\imageheight{#3}%
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+      \pdfimage
+    \else
+      \pdfximage
+    \fi
+      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
+      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
+      {#1.pdf}%
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
+      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
+    \fi}
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz}
+  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@}
+  \let\linkcolor = \Cyan
+  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
+  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
+  % come from Petr Olsak
+  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
+    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
+  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
+    \advance\tempnum by1
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1\else\bgroup
+      \closein 1 
+      \indexnofonts
+      \def\tt{}
+      % thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks  
+      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
+      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
+      %
+      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
+      \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
+      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
+      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
+      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \input \jobname.toc
+      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
+      \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
+      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
+      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
+      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
+      \input \jobname.toc
+    \egroup\fi
+  }}
+  \def\makelinks #1,{%
+    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
+    \ifx\params\E
+      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
+    \else
+      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
+      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
+      \picknum{#1}%
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} 
+        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
+      \linkcolor #1%
+      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
+      \endlink
+    \fi
+    \nextmakelinks
+  }
+  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
+  \def\pn#1{%
+    \def\p{#1}%
+    \ifx\p\lbrace
+      \let\nextpn=\ppn
+    \else
+      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
+      \def\first{#1}
+    \fi
+    \nextpn
+  }
+  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
+  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
+  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
+  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+        \advance\filenamelength by 1
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \nextsp}
+  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
+  \else
+    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
+  \fi
+  \def\pdfurl#1{%
+    \begingroup
+      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
+      \leavevmode\Red
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+        % #1
+    \endgroup}
+  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
+  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+  \def\maketoks{%
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
+    \ifx\first0\adn0
+    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
+    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
+    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 
+    \else
+      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
+      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+        \let\next=\maketoks
+        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
+        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \next}
+  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
+    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
+  \def\pdflink#1{%
+    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}}
+    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
+  \def\mkpgn#1{#1@} 
+  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+
+% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad.
+% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded.
+% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+
+%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}      % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
+%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}      % Also, the size is a little larger than
+%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}      % being scaled magstep1.
+%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
+%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
+
+%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
+% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
+% also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
+  \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
+}
+
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \resetmathfonts}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\def\smallfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
+  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
+  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}}
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartslanted
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+\let\ttfont=\t
+\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\keysy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \frenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+%  -- rms.
+{
+  \catcode`\-=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  %
+  \global\def\code{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
+    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
+  % just treat them as a normal -.
+  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+%\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+  \def\arg{#1}%
+  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
+% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
+\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
+% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
+% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
+% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
+% a hypertex \special here.
+%
+\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
+\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  \pdfurl{#1}%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+  \else
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+      \ifpdf
+        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+      \else
+        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
+% 
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\ifpdf
+  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+    \unsepspaces
+    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+    \endlink
+  \endgroup}
+\else
+  \let\email=\uref
+\fi
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
+\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+%
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+   %
+   % Now you can print the title using @title.
+   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
+                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+   %
+   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+   \let\oldpage = \page
+   \def\page{%
+      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+         \finishtitlepage
+      \fi
+      \oldpage
+      \let\page = \oldpage
+      \hbox{}}%
+%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+      \finishtitlepage
+   \fi
+   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+   \oldpage
+   \endgroup
+   %
+   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \shortcontents
+     \contents
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \contents
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+   %
+   \HEADINGSon
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+  %
+  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
+  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off         turns them off.
+% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% Produces Day Month Year style of output.
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
+  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
+  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
+  \fi
+  \space\number\year}
+
+% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
+% It generates no output of its own.
+\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+  \itemindex{#1}%
+  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+  %
+  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+    %
+    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+    % but leave it ragged-right.
+    \begingroup
+      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+    %
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
+    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+    % \baselineskip glue.
+    \nobreak
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+  \else
+    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
+    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+    \noindent
+    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+    % eventually be printed.
+    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+    \unhbox0
+    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
+  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% These are `.?!:;,'
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
+  \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+  %
+  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+  \def\thearg{#1}%
+  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+  %
+  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
+  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+  \ifx\rest\empty
+    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
+    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+    %   not equal to itself.
+    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+    %
+    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+    % continuing to look for a <number>.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+    \else
+      % It's a letter.
+      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+      \else
+        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
+    \numericenumerate
+  \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \thearg
+  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}%
+    \fi
+    \char\lccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}
+    \fi
+    \char\uccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+  \advance\itemno by -1
+  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+%   @item ...
+%
+%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+%   columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item ...
+%   using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+%      template}
+% Not:
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+%      {Column 3 template}
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+%   @item
+%   first col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   second col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   third col
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+%   @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+%                                                            to baseline.
+%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+%
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
+% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
+% just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
+% percent of \hsize for this column.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
+  \global\advance\colcount by 1
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
+  \setuptable
+}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{%
+  \def\firstarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+    \let\go = \relax
+  \else
+    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+      \global\setpercenttrue
+    \else
+      \ifsetpercent
+         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+      \else
+         \global\advance\colcount by 1
+         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
+                            % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+    \else
+      \let\go = \setuptable
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+  \go
+}
+
+% This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is
+% not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we
+% encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
+% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+\def\tab{&}
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+%
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+  \vskip\parskip
+  \let\item\crcr
+  \tolerance=9500
+  \hbadness=9500
+  \setmultitablespacing
+  \parskip=\multitableparskip
+  \parindent=\multitableparindent
+  \overfullrule=0pt
+  \global\colcount=0
+  \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
+  %
+  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+  %
+  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+  % The table preamble
+  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+  \everycr{\noalign{%
+  %
+  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
+  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
+  %
+  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
+    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+  %
+  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+  % the first one.
+  %
+  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+  % to the width of each template entry.
+  %
+  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+  %
+  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+  \rightskip=0pt
+  \ifnum\colcount=1
+    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+  \else
+    \ifsetpercent \else
+      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+    \fi
+   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+  \fi
+  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+  % For example:
+  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+  % @item @code{#}
+  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+  % characters.
+  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
+\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+\else
+%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{conditionals,}
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+  \let\chapter=\relax
+  \let\unnumbered=\relax
+  \let\top=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+  \let\section=\relax
+  \let\subsec=\relax
+  \let\subsubsec=\relax
+  \let\subsection=\relax
+  \let\subsubsection=\relax
+  \let\appendix=\relax
+  \let\appendixsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsection=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+  \let\contents=\relax
+  \let\smallbook=\relax
+  \let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+  \let\defcv = \relax
+  \let\deffn = \relax
+  \let\deffnx = \relax
+  \let\defindex = \relax
+  \let\defivar = \relax
+  \let\defmac = \relax
+  \let\defmethod = \relax
+  \let\defop = \relax
+  \let\defopt = \relax
+  \let\defspec = \relax
+  \let\deftp = \relax
+  \let\deftypefn = \relax
+  \let\deftypefun = \relax
+  \let\deftypeivar = \relax
+  \let\deftypeop = \relax
+  \let\deftypevar = \relax
+  \let\deftypevr = \relax
+  \let\defun = \relax
+  \let\defvar = \relax
+  \let\defvr = \relax
+  \let\ref = \relax
+  \let\xref = \relax
+  \let\printindex = \relax
+  \let\pxref = \relax
+  \let\settitle = \relax
+  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+  \let\everyheading = \relax
+  \let\evenheading = \relax
+  \let\oddheading = \relax
+  \let\everyfooting = \relax
+  \let\evenfooting = \relax
+  \let\oddfooting = \relax
+  \let\headings = \relax
+  \let\include = \relax
+  \let\lowersections = \relax
+  \let\down = \relax
+  \let\raisesections = \relax
+  \let\up = \relax
+  \let\set = \relax
+  \let\clear = \relax
+  \let\item = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
+%
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+
+% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
+%
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+  \ignoresections
+  %
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
+  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
+  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+  %
+  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+  \catcode32 = 10
+  %
+  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+  \catcode`\{ = 9
+  \catcode`\} = 9
+  %
+  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
+  \catcode`\@ = 12
+  %
+  % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
+  % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
+  %   @c @end ifinfo
+  % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
+  % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
+  \catcode`\c = 14
+  %
+  % And now expand that command.
+  \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+    \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+  \obstexwarn
+  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
+  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
+  % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+  % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+  %
+  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+    \ignoresections
+    %
+    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+    % @end command again.
+    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+    %
+    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
+    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+    % undefine them.
+    %
+    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+    \ignoremorecommands
+    %
+    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
+    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
+    % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
+    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+    % stuff compared to the main input.
+    %
+    \nullfont
+    \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
+    \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
+    \let\tensf=\nullfont
+    % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample).
+    \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
+    \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
+    \let\smallsf=\nullfont
+    %
+    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+    \tracinglostchars = 0
+    %
+    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+    \frenchspacing
+    %
+    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+    \hbadness = 10000
+    %
+    % Do minimal line-breaking.
+    \pretolerance = 10000
+    %
+    % Do not execute instructions in @tex
+    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+    % Do not execute macro definitions.
+    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
+    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
+%
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+  \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  %
+  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
+  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
+  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
+  \gdef\value{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
+    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
+    \valuexxx}
+}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
+% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
+% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
+% winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
+% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
+% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
+% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+%
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
+\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifsetfail
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
+\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifclearfail
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
+% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex'
+% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+
+% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
+% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
+% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
+% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
+% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
+% the @ifset might be nested.)
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
+  \edef\temp{%
+    % Remember the current value of \E#1.
+    \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
+    %
+    % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
+    \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
+  }%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
+% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+%
+\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% @defininfoenclose.
+\let\definfoenclose=\comment
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
+    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
+
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
+}
+
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+
+% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+    \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+\def\indexdummies{%
+\def\ { }%
+% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
+\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
+\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
+\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
+\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
+\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
+\def\={\realbackslash =}%
+\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
+\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
+\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
+\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
+\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
+\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
+\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
+\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
+\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
+\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
+\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
+\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
+\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
+\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
+\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
+\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
+% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
+% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
+% laboriously list every single command here.)
+\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
+% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  
+\let\{ = \mylbrace
+\let\} = \myrbrace
+\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
+\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
+\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
+%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
+\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
+\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
+\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
+\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
+\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
+\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
+\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
+\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
+\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
+\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
+\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
+\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
+\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
+\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
+\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
+\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
+\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
+\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
+\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
+\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
+\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
+\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
+\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
+\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
+\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
+\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
+\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
+\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
+\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
+\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
+\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
+\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
+\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
+\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
+\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
+\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
+\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
+\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
+%
+% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
+% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
+% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+\let\value = \expandablevalue
+%
+\unsepspaces
+% Turn off macro expansion
+\turnoffmacros
+}
+
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
+% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
+% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
+\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+% Just ignore accents.
+\let\,=\indexdummyfont
+\let\"=\indexdummyfont
+\let\`=\indexdummyfont
+\let\'=\indexdummyfont
+\let\^=\indexdummyfont
+\let\~=\indexdummyfont
+\let\==\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\c=\indexdummyfont
+\let\d=\indexdummyfont
+\let\u=\indexdummyfont
+\let\v=\indexdummyfont
+\let\H=\indexdummyfont
+\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{oe}%
+\def\ae{ae}%
+\def\aa{aa}%
+\def\OE{OE}%
+\def\AE{AE}%
+\def\AA{AA}%
+\def\o{o}%
+\def\O{O}%
+\def\l{l}%
+\def\L{L}%
+\def\ss{ss}%
+\let\w=\indexdummyfont
+\let\t=\indexdummyfont
+\let\r=\indexdummyfont
+\let\i=\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
+\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
+\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
+\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
+%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
+%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
+\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
+\let\code=\indexdummyfont
+\let\url=\indexdummyfont
+\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
+\let\env=\indexdummyfont
+\let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
+\let\command=\indexdummyfont
+\let\option=\indexdummyfont
+\let\file=\indexdummyfont
+\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
+\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
+\let\key=\indexdummyfont
+\let\var=\indexdummyfont
+\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+\let\dots=\indexdummydots
+\def\@{@}%
+}
+
+% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
+% We must first make another character (@) an escape
+% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
+ @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% For \ifx comparisons.
+\def\emptymacro{\empty}
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+%
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
+% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+%
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+  \fi
+  {%
+    \count255=\lastpenalty
+    {%
+      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+      \escapechar=`\\
+      {%
+        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+        %
+        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+        %
+        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
+          \let\subentry = \empty
+        \else
+          \def\subentry{ #3}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
+        % off to get the string to sort by.
+        {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
+        %
+        % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
+        \toks0 = {#2}%
+        %
+        % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
+        % string.  And include a space.
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
+          \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key
+        % and the original text, including any font commands.  We write
+        % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to
+        % two when writing the .??s sorted result.
+        \edef\temp{%
+          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
+        % like this:
+        % @end defun
+        % @tindex whatever
+        % @defun ...
+        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+        % the previous defun.
+        %
+        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+        %
+        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+        %
+        \iflinks
+          \ifvmode
+            \skip0 = \lastskip
+            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
+          \fi
+          %
+          \temp % do the write
+          %
+          %
+          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }%
+    \penalty\count255
+  }%
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+%  \initial {c}
+%     before the first topic whose initial is c
+%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
+%  \primary {topic}
+%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+%     for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+  %
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  \tolerance = 9500
+  \indexbreaks
+  %
+  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+  % \initial {@}
+  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+  \catcode`\@ = 11
+  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+  \ifeof 1
+    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+    % there is some text.
+    \putwordIndexNonexistent
+  \else
+    %
+    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+    \read 1 to \temp
+    \ifeof 1
+      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
+    \else
+      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+      % to make right now.
+      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+      \catcode`\\ = 0
+      \escapechar = `\\
+      \begindoublecolumns
+      \input \jobname.#1s
+      \enddoublecolumns
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+  %
+  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+  \removelastskip
+  %
+  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+  \penalty -300
+  %
+  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
+  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+  %
+  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+  %
+  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+  \nobreak
+}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
+  %
+  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+  % affect previous text.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+  \parfillskip = 0in
+  %
+  % No extra space above this paragraph.
+  \parskip = 0in
+  %
+  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+  %
+  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+  %
+  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+  \hangindent = 2em
+  %
+  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+  % with blank space.
+  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+  %
+  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+  %
+  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+  #1%
+  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+  \def\tempb{#2}%
+  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+    %
+    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+    \hfil\penalty50
+    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+    %
+    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+    % \hbox ensues.
+    \ifpdf
+      \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+    \else
+      \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+    \fi
+  \fi%
+  \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+
+\def\secondary #1#2{
+{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
+\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
+\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % Grab any single-column material above us.
+  \output = {%
+    %
+    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
+    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
+    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
+    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
+    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
+      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+      % Unvbox the main output page.
+      \unvbox\PAGE
+      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+    }%
+  }%
+  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+  %
+  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+  %
+  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
+  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
+  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+  %
+  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
+  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+  %
+  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+  % been clobbered.
+  %
+  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  %
+  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
+  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+  \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
+  \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+%
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+  % previous page.
+  \dimen@ = \vsize
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  %
+  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+  \onepageout\pagesofar
+  \unvbox255
+  \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+\def\pagesofar{%
+  % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+  % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+  \unvbox\partialpage
+  %
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  \output = {%
+    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
+    % current page, no automatic page break.
+    \balancecolumns
+    %
+    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+  }%
+  \eject
+  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+  %
+  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
+  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
+  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
+  \pagegoal = \vsize
+}
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+  % Called at the end of the double column material.
+  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+  \dimen@ = \ht0
+  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+  {%
+    \vbadness = 10000
+    \loop
+      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+    \repeat
+  }%
+  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+  %
+  \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno        \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+\def\appendixletter{%
+  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
+  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
+  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
+  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
+  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
+  \else\char\the\appendixno
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thissection{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \chapterzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \appendixzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\the\chapno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \appendixno by 1
+\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+                       {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\global\let\section = \appendixsec
+\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+%
+% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+% argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+% expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+% to be executed, not expanded).
+%
+% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+% the toc entries.)
+\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+%
+\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
+                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
+                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+%          overlong headings to fold.
+%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+  \pchapsepmacro
+  {%
+    \chapfonts \rm
+    \def\chapnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+  }%
+  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+    \leftskip = \rightskip
+    \parfillskip = 0pt
+  }%
+  \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
+
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt
+                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+
+
+% Print any size section title.
+%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+  }%
+  {%
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+    \def\secnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    %
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #3}%
+  }%
+  \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+% Table of contents.
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
+% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+%
+% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
+% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
+%
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\writetocentry#1{%
+  \iftocfileopened\else
+    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+  \fi
+  \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+   \contentsalignmacro
+   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+   %
+   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+   \savepageno = \pageno
+   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
+      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
+      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+      %
+      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+      \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+     \ifeof 1 \else
+       \closein 1
+       \input \jobname.toc
+     \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+     \pdfmakeoutlines
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+      %
+      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+      \secfonts
+      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
+      \rm
+      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+      \ifeof 1 \else
+        \closein 1
+        \input \jobname.toc
+      \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+\ifpdf
+  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
+\fi
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
+}
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+%
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix}%
+  \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
+  %
+  % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
+  % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
+  \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
+  %
+  % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
+  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
+  % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
+  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
+  \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+% @foo ... @end foo.
+
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
+\newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox
+\newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox
+\newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox
+
+%{\tentt
+%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
+% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
+%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
+%                                      depth .1ex\hfil}
+%}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\%=14
+  \catcode 43=12 % plus
+  \catcode`\"=12
+  \catcode`\==12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \escapechar=`\\
+  %
+  \let\b=\ptexb
+  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+  \let\c=\ptexc
+  \let\,=\ptexcomma
+  \let\.=\ptexdot
+  \let\dots=\ptexdots
+  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+  \let\!=\ptexexclam
+  \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+  \let\+=\tabalign
+  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\*=\ptexstar
+  \let\t=\ptext
+  %
+  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+  \def\@{@}%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\long\def\cartouche{%
+\begingroup
+        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+        \cartouter=\hsize
+        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
+%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
+        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+        \vbox\bgroup
+                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+                \carttop
+                \hbox\bgroup
+                        \hskip\lskip
+                        \vrule\kern3pt
+                        \vbox\bgroup
+                                \hsize=\cartinner
+                                \kern3pt
+                                \begingroup
+                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
+                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
+                                        \parskip=\normpskip
+                                        \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+                                \endgroup
+                                \kern3pt
+                        \egroup
+                        \kern3pt\vrule
+                        \hskip\rskip
+                \egroup
+                \cartbot
+        \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+  \singlespace
+  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+  \parskip = 0pt
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+  % at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+%
+% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
+% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
+% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
+% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
+% the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+  \tt
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble       % eat return
+}
+
+% @example: Same as @lisp.
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
+% redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
+% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
+% whatever) command.
+%
+% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
+% @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
+%
+\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
+\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallfonts
+  \lisp
+}
+
+% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  \display
+}
+
+% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  \format
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format).
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+
+% @flushright.
+%
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \singlespace
+  \parindent=0pt
+  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% @defun etc.
+
+% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
+% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
+\def\activeparens{%
+\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
+\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\let\ampnr = \&
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
+{
+  \catcode`& = 13
+  \global\let& = \ampnr
+}
+
+% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
+% #1 should be the function name.
+% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
+
+\def\defname #1#2{%
+% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
+% outside the @def...
+\dimen2=\leftskip
+\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+\noindent
+\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
+\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
+\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
+\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
+% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
+% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
+% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
+{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+% so that \rightline will obey them.
+\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
+\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
+% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
+\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+{\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
+}
+
+% Actually process the body of a definition
+% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
+% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
+% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
+%    such as \defunheader.
+
+\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
+\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
+
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+%
+\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
+
+% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
+% #5 is the method's return type.
+%
+\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
+  \medbreak
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
+
+% Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
+% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
+% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
+% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
+% input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
+% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
+% 
+\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
+  \medbreak
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
+    \def#4{##1}%
+    \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active %
+\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
+
+% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
+% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %
+  \medbreak %
+  % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+  % so that it will exit this group.
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
+
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% Split up #2 at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+
+{\obeylines
+\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
+\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
+\ifx\relax #3%
+#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+
+% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
+% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+
+\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
+{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
+#1%
+{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+
+% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+%               at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+%
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+%
+\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
+  \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
+                       \deftypeopcategory}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}
+            {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
+%
+\def\deftypeivar{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
+\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#3}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defvarargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+%
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
+\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defunargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
+%
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+%
+\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
+    \defvarargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defvar
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+% 
+\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scanmacro#1{%
+   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+   % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+   \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
+   % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+   \toks0={#1\endinput}%
+   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+   \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+   \input \jobname.tmp
+   \endgroup
+}
+\else
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
+\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
+\fi
+
+\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
+\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
+                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
+
+% Utility routines.
+% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter\let
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\csname#1\endcsname
+\csname#2\endcsname}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=12
+  \catcode`\^=12
+  \catcode`\_=12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode`\+=12
+  \catcode`\{=12
+  \catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`\@=12
+  \catcode`\^^M=12
+  \usembodybackslash}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=12
+  \catcode`\^=12
+  \catcode`\_=12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode`\+=12
+  \catcode`\@=12
+  \catcode`\\=12}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
+     \paramno=0%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+  \fi
+  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+     \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi
+     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
+     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
+     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
+       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+  \fi}
+
+\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
+\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
+  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
+    \begingroup
+      \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
+      \def\do##1{%
+        \def\tempb{##1}%
+        \ifx\tempa\tempb
+          % remove this
+        \else
+          \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
+          \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
+        \fi}%
+      \def\newmacrolist{}%
+      % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
+      \macrolist
+      \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+    \advance\paramno by 1%
+    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+  \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+  \ifrecursive
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+        \egroup
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+      \paramlist{%
+          \egroup
+          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+    \expandafter\parsearg
+  \fi \next}
+
+% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
+% expanded by \write.
+\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
+  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+
+% @alias.
+% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
+% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
+\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
+\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
+           \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+% @xref etc.
+
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
+\def\donoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\unnumbnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\appendixnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\newcount\savesfregister
+\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
+% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
+% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
+% aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
+% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{{%
+  \indexdummies
+  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
+  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
+}}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+  \ifpdf
+    \leavevmode
+    \getfilename{#4}%
+    \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+        goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}%
+    \else
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+        goto name{#1@}%
+    \fi
+    \linkcolor
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+  \else
+    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+    {\normalturnoffactive
+     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+    }%
+    % [mynode],
+    [\printednodename],\space
+    % page 3
+    \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
+
+% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
+\def\dosetq#1#2{%
+  {\let\folio=0%
+   \normalturnoffactive
+   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
+   \iflinks
+     \next
+   \fi
+  }%
+}
+
+% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
+% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
+% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
+
+\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
+
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+
+\def\Ynothing{}
+
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+    \iflinks
+      \ifhavexrefs
+        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+      \else
+        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+          \global\warnedxrefstrue
+          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \csname X#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
+  % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
+  \catcode`\\ = 0
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^A=\other
+  \catcode`\^^B=\other
+  \catcode`\^^C=\other
+  \catcode`\^^D=\other
+  \catcode`\^^E=\other
+  \catcode`\^^F=\other
+  \catcode`\^^G=\other
+  \catcode`\^^H=\other
+  \catcode`\^^K=\other
+  \catcode`\^^L=\other
+  \catcode`\^^N=\other
+  \catcode`\^^P=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode`\^^R=\other
+  \catcode`\^^S=\other
+  \catcode`\^^T=\other
+  \catcode`\^^U=\other
+  \catcode`\^^V=\other
+  \catcode`\^^W=\other
+  \catcode`\^^X=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode`\^^[=\other
+  \catcode`\^^\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^]=\other
+  \catcode`\^^^=\other
+  \catcode`\^^_=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\[=\other
+  \catcode`\]=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\#=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+  {%
+    \count 1=128
+    \def\loop{%
+      \catcode\count 1=\other
+      \advance\count 1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+  % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
+  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+  % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  \catcode`\{=1
+  \catcode`\}=2
+  \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`\'=0
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \closein 1
+    \input \jobname.aux
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+  \fi
+  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+  %
+  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+  \let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  %
+  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+  \unskip
+  \thisfootno\@sf
+  \footnotezzz
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+  % So reset some parameters.
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip
+  \xspaceskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\defaultparindent
+  %
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.
+  \hang
+  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+  %
+  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
+  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+  \footstrut
+  \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
+  \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
+\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
+\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
+\def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
+
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+%
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+  \closein 1
+  % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
+  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+  \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+%
+% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+\def\image#1{%
+  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+      \global\warnednoepsftrue
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  \ifpdf
+    \centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+  \else
+    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+    \begingroup
+      \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
+      % If the image is by itself, center it.
+      \ifvmode
+        \nobreak\bigskip
+        % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
+        % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
+        % above and below. 
+        \nobreak\vskip\parskip
+        \nobreak
+        \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
+        \bigbreak
+      \else
+        % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space.
+        \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+      \fi
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{localization,}
+% and i18n.
+
+% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
+% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
+% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
+% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
+%
+\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
+\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
+  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
+  % Read the file if it exists.
+  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+  \ifeof1
+    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+    \let\temp = \relax
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
+  \fi
+  \temp
+  \endgroup
+}
+\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
+is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
+should work if nowhere else does.}
+
+
+% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
+% likely, but for now just recognize it.
+\let\documentencoding = \comment
+
+
+% Page size parameters.
+%
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+  \else
+    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  Then whoever calls us can
+% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \voffset = #3\relax
+  \topskip = #6\relax
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  %
+  \vsize = #1\relax
+  \advance\vsize by \topskip
+  \outervsize = \vsize
+  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+  \pageheight = \vsize
+  %
+  \hsize = #2\relax
+  \outerhsize = \hsize
+  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+  \pagewidth = \hsize
+  %
+  \normaloffset = #4\relax
+  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+  %
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+  \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  %
+  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+  \setleading{12pt}%
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \deftypemargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .5cm
+  %
+  \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
+  \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
+  \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
+  \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \setleading{12pt}%
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+  %
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
+% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \setleading{13.6pt}%
+  %
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
+  %
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
+\def\afourwide{%
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+  %
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+%
+\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
+\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \globaldefs = 1
+  %
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+%
+\letterpaper
+
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\catcode`\$=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+\def\normaldollar{$}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
+% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
+% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
+% this is not a problem.
+\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+\catcode`\$=\active
+\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}
+%\catcode 27=\active
+%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+%{\catcode`\\=\other
+%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+
+% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+% \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@realbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus
+@let$=@normaldollar}
+
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@normalbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus
+@let$=@normaldollar}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{%
+  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+  @catcode`+=@active
+  @catcode`@_=@active
+}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+@escapechar = `@@
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  
+@catcode`@& = @other
+@catcode`@# = @other
+@catcode`@% = @other
+
+@c Set initial fonts.
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End: